Symbol Technologies Scanner Ls4208 Users Manual
LS4208 to the manual f57ed4c4-2e90-4e1a-a6ba-06e80035d8f0
2015-02-02
: Symbol-Technologies Symbol-Technologies-Symbol-Scanner-Ls4208-Users-Manual-449005 symbol-technologies-symbol-scanner-ls4208-users-manual-449005 symbol-technologies pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 342
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
LS4208 Product Reference Guide LS4208 Product Reference Guide 72E-69413-03 Revision A January 2007 © 2005-2007 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice. The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof. Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design. Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein. No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Symbol products. Symbol, Spectrum One, and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged. Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com Revision History Changes to the original manual are listed below: Change Date Description 72E-69413-01 5/2005 Initial release. 72E-69413-02 6/2005 Update RSS description. 72E-69413-03 1/2007 Update service section, add special IBM command bar codes, add parameter bar codes for Bookland ISBN format and new UPC supplemental decode options, add bar codes for report version, report MIMIC version, and report Synapse cable, add ADF section. Contents About This Guide Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Chapter 1. Getting Started Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Configuring the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Chapter 2. Scanning Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Assemble the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 vi LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanning with Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Chapter 3. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Scanner Signal Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Chapter 4. User Preferences Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 User Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Default Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Laser On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Chapter 5. Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Keyboard Wedge Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Intra-Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Caps Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Keyboard Maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Chapter 6. RS-232 Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Contents vii Connecting an RS-232 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Software Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Beep on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Intercharacter Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 Chapter 7. USB Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 USB Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 USB Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 Convert Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Chapter 8. IBM Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Port Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Optional IBM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Ignore Beep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 viii LS4208 Product Reference Guide Chapter 9. Wand Emulation Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Wand Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Chapter 10. Scanner Emulation Interface Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Scanner Emulation Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Beep Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Module Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Leading Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Chapter 11. 123Scan Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 123Scan Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 Chapter 12. Symbologies Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13 Contents ix Transmit UPC-E Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14 UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-14 UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15 UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-17 Bookland ISBN Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-19 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-20 Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Chinese 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-41 NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-42 x LS4208 Product Reference Guide MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-47 Symbology - Specific Security Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50 Intercharacter Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51 Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report MIMIC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report Synapse Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Chapter 13. Miscellaneous Scanner Options Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Scan Data Transmission Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 FN1 Substitution Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8 Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9 Chapter 14. Advanced Data Formatting Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8 Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8 Disable Rule Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 Contents xi Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13 Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-29 Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77 Appendix A. Standard Default Parameters Appendix B. Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Appendix C. Sample Bar Codes Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPC/EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPC-A, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EAN-13, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-5 Appendix D. Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 Appendix E. ASCII Character Sets Index xii LS4208 Product Reference Guide About This Guide Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Chapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Notational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi xiv LS4208 Product Reference Guide xv Introduction The LS4208 Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the LS4208 scanner. The scanner includes the following variations of the scanner: Chapter Descriptions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Chapter 1, Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information. Chapter 2, Scanning describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner in hand-held and hands-free modes. Chapter 3, Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications. Chapter 4, User Preferences provides programming bar codes for selecting user preference features for the scanner. Chapter 5, Keyboard Wedge Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for Keyboard Wedge operation. Chapter 6, RS-232 Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for RS-232 operation. Chapter 7, USB Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for USB operation. Chapter 8, IBM Interface provides all information for setting up the scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems. Chapter 9, Wand Emulation Interface provides all information for setting up the scanner for Wand Emulation operation. Chapter 10, Scanner Emulation Interface provides information for setting up the scanner for Scanner Emulation operation. Chapter 11, 123Scan (PC based scanner configuration tool) provides the bar code that must be scanned to communicate with the 123Scan program. Chapter 12, Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features for the scanner. Chapter 13, Miscellaneous Scanner Options includes commonly used bar codes to customize how the data is transmitted to the host device. Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting details Advanced Data Formatting (ADF), a means of customizing data before transmission to a host device. Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults. Appendix B, Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps. Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes includes sample bar codes. Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes includes the numeric bar codes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values. Appendix E, ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables. Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document: • • Bullets (•) indicate: • action items • lists of alternatives • lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential. Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. xvi LS4208 Product Reference Guide • Throughout the programming bar code menus, asterisks (*) are used to denote default parameter settings. * Indicates Default *Baud Rate 9600 Feature/Option Related Publications The LS4208 Quick Reference Guide (p/n 72-69411-xx) provides general information to help the user get started with the scanner. It includes basic operation instructions and start up bar codes. For the latest versions of the LS4208 Quick Reference Guide and the LS4208 Product Reference Guide go to: http://www.symbol.com/manuals. Service Information If there is a problem with the equipment, contact the regional Global Customer Interaction Center. For contact number information, visit: www.symbol.com/contactsupport for a Customer Interaction Center in your area. Before calling, have the model number, serial number and several bar code symbols at hand. Call the Global Customer Interaction Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to troubleshoot the problem. If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is reading bar codes, the Support Center will request samples of the bar codes for analysis at our plant. If the problem cannot be solved over the phone, it may be necessary to return the equipment for servicing. If that is necessary, the Global Customer Interaction Center will provide specific directions. Note Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. If the original shipping container was not kept, contact Symbol to have another sent. If the Symbol product was purchased from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service. Getting Started Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Setting Up the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Installing the Interface Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Removing the Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Connecting Power (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Configuring the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Getting Started 1-3 Introduction The scanner combines excellent scanning performance and advanced ergonomics to provide the best value in a lightweight laser scanner. Whether used as a hand-held scanner or in hands-free mode in a stand, the scanner ensures comfort and ease of use for extended periods of time. In addition to single-line laser scanning, the scanner supports multi-line rastering. Multi-line rastering allows the scanner to capture stacked RSS codes and increases angular tolerances, minimizing product orientation and hand movements. Multi-line rastering also allows the scanner to read poor quality bar codes. For more information about scanning modes and stacked RSS codes, see Scan Pattern on page 4-7 and RSS on page C-4. The scanner does not currently support PDF217 bar codes and its variants. Figure 1-1. LS4208 Scanner This scanner supports the following interfaces: • • • • • • • • Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese. Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan bar code menus to set up proper communication of the scanner with the host. USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming bar code menus.This interface supports the following international keyboards (for Windows® environment): North America, German, French, French Canadian, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, UK English, Portuguese-Brazilian, and Japanese. Connection to IBM® 468X/469X hosts. Scan bar code menus to set up communication of the scanner with the IBM terminal. Wand Emulation connection to a host. The scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller, or host which collects the data as wand data and decodes it. Scanner Emulation connection to a host. The scanner is connected to a portable data terminal, a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host. Synapse capability which allows connection to a wide variety of host systems using a Synapse and Synapse adapter cable. The scanner autodetects the host. Configuration via 123Scan. 1-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Unpacking Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit, call the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container and should be used if the equipment ever needs to be return for servicing. Setting Up the Scanner Installing the Interface Cable To connect the interface cable: 1. Insert the interface cable’s modular connector clip into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle. (See Figure 1-2.). 2. Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is properly secured. 3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host. (See the specific host chapter for information on host connections.) Cable interface port Interface cable modular connector clip Interface cable modular connector To host Figure 1-2. Installing the Cable Different cables are required for different hosts. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only. Actual connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. Getting Started 1-5 Removing the Interface Cable To remove the interface cable: 1. Unplug the installed cable’s modular connector by depressing the connector clip with the tip of a screwdriver. 2. Carefully slide out the cable. 3. Follow the steps for Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4 to connect a new cable. Connecting a Synapse Cable Interface Refer to the Synapse Interface Guide provided with the Synapse cable for detailed setup instructions. Symbol’s Synapse Smart Cables enable interfacing to a variety of hosts. The appropriate Synapse cable has the built-in intelligence to detect the host to which it is connected. To host Synapse Adapter Cable Synapse Smart Cable To Scanner Figure 1-3. Synapse Cable Connection 1. Plug the Synapse adapter cable (p/n 25-32463-xx) into the bottom of the scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4. 2. Align the ‘S’ on the Synapse adapter cable with the ‘S’ on the Synapse Smart Cable and plug the cable in. 3. Connect the other end of the Synapse Smart Cable to the host. Connecting Power (if required) If the host does not provide power to the scanner, an external power connection to the scanner is required. To connect power: 1. Connect the interface cable to the bottom of the scanner, as described in Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4. 2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port). 3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into an AC outlet. Configuring the Scanner To configure the scanner, use the bar codes included in this manual, or the 123Scan configuration program. See Chapter 4, User Preferences, Chapter 12, Symbologies and Chapter 13, Miscellaneous Scanner Options for information about programming the scanner using bar code menus. Also see each host-specific chapter to set up a connection to a specific host type. See Chapter 11, 123Scan to configure the scanner using this configuration program. A help file is available in the program. 1-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanning Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Beeper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 LED Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Assemble the Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Scanning with Intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Decode Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanning 2-3 Introduction This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, techniques involved in scanning bar codes, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams. LED Scan Window Beeper Trigger Figure 2-1. Parts 2-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Beeper Definitions The scanner issues different beep sequences and patterns to indicate status. Table 2-1 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner. Table 2-1. Beeper Definitions Beeper Sequence Indication Standard Use Low/medium/high beeps Power up. Short high beeps A bar code symbol was decoded (if decode beeper is enabled). 4 long low beeps A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. 5 low beeps Conversion or format error. Low/high/low beeps Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) transmit error. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. High/high/high/low beeps RS-232 receive error. Parameter Menu Scanning Short high beeps Correct entry scanned or correct menu sequence performed. Low/high beeps Input error, incorrect bar code or “Cancel” scanned, wrong entry, incorrect bar code programming sequence; remain in program mode. High/low beeps Keyboard parameter selected. Enter value using bar code keypad. High/low/high/low beeps Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting. Low/high/low/high beeps Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Default Parameters on page 4-5. Code 39 Buffering High/low beeps New Code 39 data was entered into the buffer. 3 Beeps - long high beeps Code 39 buffer is full. Low/high/low beeps The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. Low/high beeps A successful transmission of buffered data. Host Specific USB only 4 short high beeps Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again. Scanner gives a power-up beep after scanning a USB Device Type. Communication with the bus must be established before the scanner can operate at the highest power level. This power-up beep occurs more than once. The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once. This is normal and usually happens when the host cold boots. RS-232 only 1 short high beep A character is received and Beep on is enabled. Scanning 2-5 LED Definitions In addition to beeper sequences, the scanner communicates with the user using a two-color LED display. Table 2-2 defines LED colors that display during scanning. Table 2-2. Standard LED Definitions LED Indication Off No power is applied to the scanner, or the scanner is on and ready to scan. Green A bar code was successfully decoded. Red A data transmission error or scanner malfunction occurred. Scanning in Hand-Held Mode Install and program the scanner (see Setting Up the Scanner on page 1-4). For assistance, contact the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information. To scan in hand-held mode: 1. Ensure all connections are secure. (See the host chapter for the scanner.) 2. Aim the scanner at the bar code. 3. Press the trigger. Single-Line Mode Multi-Line Raster Mode Figure 2-2. Scanning in Hand-Held Mode 4. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. (For more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2.) Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected (see Scan Line Width on page 4-8). A full scan line width is the default. Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or pick-lists. 2-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Aiming On a typical UPC 100% hold the scanner between contact and 19 inches from the symbol (see Decode Zone on page 2-10). When scanning using a single-line scan mode, ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol. 012345 012345 Figure 2-3. Acceptable and Incorrect Single-Line Aiming When scanning using a multi-line scan mode, at least one scan line must cross every bar and space of the symbol. 012345 012345 Figure 2-4. Acceptable and Incorrect Multi-Line Aiming Regardless of the scan mode, the scan line is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those with larger bars or elements (mil size) farther from the scanner. Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. Laser light reflecting directly back into the scanner from the bar code is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection can make decoding difficult. Scan line lengths vary depending on the scan line width selected. A full scan line width is the default. Medium and short scan line widths are useful for scanning menus or pick-lists. For more information about scan line widths and scanning modes, see page 4-7 and page 4-8, respectively. Scanning 2-7 The scanner can be tilted up to 65° forward or back and achieve a successful decode (Figure 2-5). Simple practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within. 65 65 o o Figure 2-5. Maximum Tilt Angles and Dead Zone 2-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanning in Hands-Free Mode The optional Intellistand adds greater flexibility to scanning operation. When the scanner is seated in the stand’s “cup,” the scanner’s built-in sensor places the scanner in hands-free mode. When the scanner is removed from the stand, it automatically switches modes to operate in its normal hand-held triggered mode. Assemble the Stand Figure 2-6. Assembling Intellistand Scanning 2-9 Scanning with Intellistand When the scanner is placed in the Intellistand, the scan pattern selected in hand-held triggered mode continues (see Scan Pattern on page 4-7). To operate the scanner in Intellistand: 1. Ensure the scanner is properly connected to the host (see the appropriate host chapter for information on host connections). 2. Insert the scanner in Intellistand by placing the front of the scanner into the stand’s “cup.” Cup Scanner Holder Angle Adjustment Knob Height Adjustment Knob Figure 2-7. Inserting the Scanner in the Intellistand 3. Use the Intellistand’s adjustment knobs to adjust the height and angle of the scanner. 4. Present the bar code. When the bar code is in view, the scanner emits a full scan line. After 3 minutes, the scanner automatically switches to a reduced scan line. After 1 hour, the scanner automatically switches to blink mode. 5. Upon successful decode, the scanner beeps and the LED turns green. For more information about beeper and LED definitions, see Table 2-1 and Table 2-2. 2-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Decode Zone in. cm 15 38.1 10 25.4 5 12.7 0 0 5 12.7 10 25.4 15 38.1 Note: Typical performance at 73° F (23° C) on high quality symbols in normal room light. LS 4208 1.5 5 mil 5.5 10 mil * 14.5 13 mil 19 20 mil in. 0 cm 0 5 12.7 29 10 25.4 15 38.1 20 50.8 25 63.5 30 76.2 Depth of Field *Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle Figure 2-8. LS4208 Decode Zone 35 88.9 40 101.6 W i d t h o f F i e l d Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Scanner Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 3-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3-3 Introduction This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts). Maintenance Cleaning the exit window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. • • • • Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window. Troubleshooting Table 3-1. Troubleshooting Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Beeper Indications The scanner emits frequent beeps. No power to the scanner. Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Incorrect host interface cable is used. Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable. Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables. ADF transmit error. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. Invalid ADF rule is detected. See Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting. Scanner emits low/high beeps. Input error, incorrect bar code or Cancel bar code was scanned. Scan the correct numeric bar codes within range for the parameter programmed. Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. The Code 39 buffer was erased or there was an attempt to clear or transmit an empty buffer. Normal when scanning the Code 39 Buffering Clear Buffer bar code or upon attempt to transmit an empty Code 39 buffer. Scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps. Out of host parameter storage space. Scan Default Parameters on page 4-5. Out of memory for ADF rules. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules. Scanner emits high/low beeps. The scanner is buffering Code 39 data. Normal. Scanner emits high/high/high/low beeps. RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting. Scanner emits four long low beeps. A transmission error was detected in a scanned symbol. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting. Scanner emits four short high beeps (USB only). Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again. Scanner emits a short low/high/low/high beep sequence while it is being programmed. Out of ADF parameter storage space. Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules. Scanner emits low/high/low beeps. 3-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions Decoding Bar Codes Scanner emits the laser, but does not decode the bar Scanner is not programmed for the correct bar code Program the scanner to read that type of bar code. code. type. See Chapter 12, Symbologies. Bar code symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same bar code type to determine if the bar code is defaced. Distance between scanner and bar code is incorrect. Move the scanner closer to or further from the bar code. See Decode Zone on page 2-10. The scan line is not crossing every bar and space of Move the symbol until the scan line is within the the symbol. acceptable aiming pattern. See Figure 2-3 on page 26. Scanner decodes bar code, but does not transmit the Scanner is not programmed for the correct host data to the host. type. Interface cable is loose. Scanner emits five long low beep after a bar code is Conversion or format error was detected. decoded. The scanner’s conversion parameters are not properly configured. Conversion or format error was detected. An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. See the chapter corresponding to the host type. Check for loose cable connection and re-connect cable. Ensure the scanner’s conversion parameters are properly configured. Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule. Conversion or format error was detected. Change the bar code, or change to a host that can A bar code was scanned with characters that can't support the bar code. be sent for that host. Host Displays Host displays scanned data incorrectly. Scanner is not programmed to work with the host. Ensure the proper host is selected. Scan the appropriate host type programming bar code. For RS-232, set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings. For a USB HID keyboard or Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type and language, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key. Program the proper editing options (e.g., ADF, UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion). Check the scanner’s host type parameters or editing options. Trigger Nothing happens when the trigger is pulled. No power to the scanner. Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables. Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3-5 Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Continued) Problem Possible Causes The laser does not appear when the trigger is pulled. No power to the scanner. Possible Solutions Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply. Incorrect host interface cable is used. Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable. Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables. If after performing these checks the symbol still does not scan, contact the distributor or the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center. See page xvi for contact information. 3-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Technical Specifications Table 3-2. Technical Specifications Item Description Physical Characteristics Dimensions: 6.7 in. H x 3.7 in. L x 2.7 in. W (17 cm H x 9.3 cm L x 6.8 cm W) Weight (without cable) Approximately 6.4 oz. (181 g) Voltage & Current 5 +/-10%VDC @ 140 mA (Stand by: <35 mA) Color Cash Register White (shown) or Twilight Black Performance Characteristics Light Source (Laser) 650nm laser diode Motor Frequency 50Hz Decode Rate 200 decodes per second Roll Tolerance ± 35° Pitch Tolerance ± 60° Yaw Tolerance ± 60° Nominal Working Distance 13 mil (100% UPC/EAN): 0 to 19 in. (48.25 cm) 5 mil (Code 39): 1.5 to 5.5 in. (3.8 cm to 13.97 cm) (See Decode Zone on page 2-10) Print Contrast Minimum 25% minimum reflectance Multi-Line Aiming Coverage At 5 in. reading distance: ~ 0.5 in. (1.3 cm) At 10 in. reading distance: ~ 1 in. (2.5 cm) Motion Tolerances Horizontal Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec Vertical Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec Angular Velocity: 200 in. (508 cm) / sec Decode Capability UPC/EAN and with supplementals, Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Trioptic Code 39, RSS Variants, UCC/EAN 128, Code 128, Code 128 Full ASCII, Code 93, Codabar (NW1), Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5 MSI, Codell, IATA, Bookland EAN, Code 32 Interfaces Supported RS-232C (Standard, Nixdorf, ICL, & Fujitsu); IBM 468x/469x; Keyboard Wedge; USB (Standard, IBM SurePOS, Macintosh); Laser/Wand Emulation. Synapse Adaptive Connectivity allows for connectivity to interfaces above and many nonstandard interfaces. User Environment Operating Temperature 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C) Storage Temperature -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C) Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing Drop Specifications Withstands multiple 6 ft./1.825 m drops to concrete Ambient Light Immunity Immune to normal artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct sunlight) lighting conditions EAS Support Optional Checkpoint Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Beeper Volume User-selectable: three levels Maintenance, Troubleshooting & Technical Specifications 3-7 Table 3-2. Technical Specifications (Continued) Item Description Beeper Tone User-selectable: three tones ESD 15 kV air discharge 8 kV indirect discharge Regulatory Electrical Safety UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950, EN60950/IEC950 Laser Safety CDRH Class II, IEC Class 2 EMI/RFI FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B, European Union EMC Directive, Australian SMA 3-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanner Signal Descriptions Bottom of scanner Cable interface port PIN 10 PIN 1 Interface cable modular connector Figure 3-1. Scanner Cable Pin-outs The signal descriptions in Table 3-3 apply to the connector on the scanner and are for reference only. Table 3-3. Scanner Signal Pin-outs Pin IBM Synapse RS-232 Keyboard Wedge Wand USB 1 Reserved SynClock Reserved Reserved Reserved Jump to Pin 6 2 Power Power Power Power Power Power 3 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 4 IBM_A(+) Reserved TxD KeyClock DBP Reserved 5 Reserved Reserved RxD TermData CTS D+ 6 IBM_B(-) SynData RTS KeyData RTS Jump to Pin 1 7 Reserved Reserved CTS TermClock Reserved D- 8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 9 EAS EAS EAS EAS EAS EAS 10 EAS EAS EAS EAS EAS EAS User Preferences Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 User Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Beeper Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Scan Line Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Laser On Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Beep After Good Decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide User Preferences 4-3 Introduction If desired, program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes each user preference feature and provides the programming bar codes necessary for selecting these features. The scanner ships with the settings shown in the User Preferences Default Table on page 4-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming may not be necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to their default values, see Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *High Frequency Feature/Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan the High Frequency (beeper tone) bar code listed under Beeper Tone on page 4-6. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Serial Response Time-Out or Data Transmission Formats, require scanning several bar codes. See these parameter descriptions for this procedure. Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, when an error is made during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. 4-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide User Preferences Parameter Defaults Table 4-1 lists the defaults for user preferences parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the User Preferences section beginning on page 4-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 4-1. User Preferences Default Table Default Page Number Set Default Parameter Restore Defaults 4-5 Beeper Tone Medium 4-6 Beeper Volume High 4-6 Power Mode Continuous On 4-7 Scan Pattern Multi-line Always Raster 4-7 Scan Line Width Full Width 4-8 Laser On Time 3.0 Sec 4-8 Beep After Good Decode Enable 4-9 Parameter User Preferences User Preferences 4-5 User Preferences Default Parameters The scanner can be reset to two types of defaults: factory defaults or custom defaults. Scan the appropriate bar code below to reset the scanner to its default settings and/or set the scanner’s current settings as the custom default. • • • Restore Defaults - Resets all default parameters as follows: • If custom default values were configured (see Write to Custom Defaults), the custom default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned. • If no custom default values were configured, the factory default values are set for all parameters each time the Restore Defaults bar code below is scanned. (For factory default values, see Table A-1 beginning on page A-1.) Set Factory Defaults - Scan the Set Factory Defaults bar code below to eliminate all custom default values and set the scanner to factory default values. (For factory default values, see Table A-1 beginning on page A-1.) Write to Custom Defaults - Custom default parameters can be configured to set unique default values for all parameters. After changing all parameters to the desired default values, scan the Write to Custom Defaults bar code below to configure custom defaults. *Restore Defaults Set Factory Defaults Write to Custom Defaults 4-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Beeper Tone To select a decode beep frequency (tone), scan the Low Frequency, Medium Frequency, or High Frequency bar code. Low Frequency *Medium Frequency (Optimum Settings) High Frequency Beeper Volume To select a beeper volume, scan the Low Volume, Medium Volume, or High Volume bar code. Low Volume Medium Volume *High Volume User Preferences 4-7 Power Mode This parameter determines whether or not power remains on after a decode attempt. When in reduced power mode, the scanner enters into a low power consumption mode to preserve battery life after each decode attempt. When in continuous power mode, power remains on after each decode attempt. *Continuous On Reduced Power Mode Scan Pattern This parameter determines the pattern (mode) of scanning. Scan the appropriate bar code below to set the scanning mode. • • • Single-line Only - Scan Single-line Only for a single-line scan mode. The laser has no up and down scan line movement (no raster). (For an example of a single-line scan, see Figure 2-3 on page 2-6.) Multi-line Smart Raster - Scan Multi-line Smart Raster for a scan line begins as a single line and moves up and down (rasters) when a partial scan of a bar code is detected, or no bar code is decoded 500 ms after the trigger is pulled. Upon seeing a stacked RSS code, the scanner immediately rasters. (For an example of a multi-line scan, see Figure 2-4 on page 26.) Multi-line Always Raster (default) - Scan Multi-line Always Raster for rastering (up and down scan line movement) to begin immediately. Single-line Only (No Raster) Multi-line Smart Raster *Multi-line Always Raster 4-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scan Line Width Scan a bar code below to set the scan line width. *Full Width Medium Width Small Width Laser On Time This parameter sets the maximum time that decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default Laser On Time is 3.0 seconds. To set a Laser On Time, scan the bar code below. Next, scan two numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1 in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes that correspond to the desired on time. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. For example, to set an On Time of 0.5 seconds, scan the bar code below, then scan the “0” and “5” bar codes. If an error is made, or the selection needs to be changed, scan Cancel on page D-4. Laser On Time User Preferences 4-9 Beep After Good Decode Scan a bar code below to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode. If Do Not Beep After Good Decode is selected, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and indicates error conditions. *Beep After Good Decode (Enable) Do Not Beep After Good Decode (Disable) 4-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Keyboard Wedge Host Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Intra-Keystroke Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Caps Lock On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Caps Lock Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Convert Wedge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 FN1 Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Send Make and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Keyboard Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-3 Introduction This chapter describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the scanner. With this interface, the scanner is connected between the keyboard and host computer, and translates bar code data into keystrokes. The host computer accepts the keystrokes as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds bar code reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *North American Feature/Option Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface Male DIN Connector Keyboard Connector Female DIN Connector Figure 5-1. Keyboard Wedge Connection with Y-cable To connect the Keyboard Wedge interface Y-cable: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 5-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector. 2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. (See Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4.) 3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device. 4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector. 5. If needed, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable. 6. Ensure that all connections are secure. 7. Turn on the host system. 8. Select the Keyboard Wedge host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters on page 5-5. 9. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. 5-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults Table 5-1 lists the defaults for Keyboard Wedge host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) in the Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters section beginning on page page 5-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 5-1. Keyboard Wedge Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles1 5-5 Country Types (Country Codes) North American 5-6 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 5-7 Keystroke Delay No Delay 5-8 Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 5-8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 5-9 Caps Lock On Disable 5-9 Caps Lock Override Disable 5-9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 5-10 Function Key Mapping Disable 5-10 FN1 Substitution Disable 5-11 Send and Make Break Send 5-11 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-5 Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Types Select the Keyboard Wedge host by scanning one of the bar codes below. IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles1 IBM AT Notebook NCR 7052 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. 5-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 5-9. *North American German Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95/98 French Canadian Windows XP/2000 Spanish Windows Italian Windows Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-7 Keyboard Wedge Country Types (continued) Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows Portuguese-Brazilian Windows Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the scanner issues an error beep. *Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters 5-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keystroke Delay This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data. *No Delay Medium Delay (20 msec) Long Delay (40 msec) Intra-Keystroke Delay When enabled, an additional delay is inserted between each emulated key depression and release. This sets the Keystroke Delay parameter to a minimum of 5 msec as well. Enable Intra-Keystroke Delay *Disable Intra-Keystroke Delay Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-9 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Keyboard Wedge Country Types (Country Codes) on page 56 in a Microsoft® operating system environment. Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad *Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad Caps Lock On When enabled, the scanner emulates keystrokes as if the Caps Lock key is always pressed. Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence Enable Caps Lock On *Disable Caps Lock On Caps Lock Override When enabled, on AT or AT Notebook hosts, the keyboard ignores the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the bar code is sent as an ‘A’ no matter what the state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key. Note that if both Caps Lock On and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence. Enable Caps Lock Override *Disable Caps Lock Override 5-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Convert Wedge Data When enabled, the scanner will convert all bar code data to the selected case. Convert to Upper Case Convert to Lower Case *No Convert Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 5-2 on page 5-13). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled. Enable Function Key Mapping *Disable Function Key Mapping Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-11 FN1 Substitution When enabled, the scanner replaces FN1 characters in an EAN128 bar code with a keystroke chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 13-8). Enable FN1 Substitution *Disable FN1 Substitution Send Make and Break When enabled, the scan codes for releasing a key are not sent. *Send Make and Break Scan Codes Send Make Scan Code Only 5-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Maps The following keyboard maps are provided for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see the bar codes on page 13-5. 5001 5002 5003 5004 7008 7009 7014 7012 7003 7013 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 7004 7011 Figure 5-2. IBM PC/AT 5001 5002 1045 5013 5003 5004 5014 5015 5005 5006 1043 5016 5007 5008 5017 5018 5009 5010 7013 5019 5011 5012 1048 1046 (7013 if double key) (1048 if double key) Figure 5-3. NCR 7052 32-KEY 1065 1066 1067 1068 1072 1073 1074 1079 1080 1081 5001 5002 5011 5003 1069 1070 1071 1075 1076 1077 1078 1082 1083 1084 1085 1045 5013 1086 5004 5014 5015 1087 5005 5006 1043 5016 1088 5007 5008 5017 5018 1089 5009 5010 7013 5019 1090 1048 5012 (1048 if double key) 1046 (1043 if double key) Figure 5-4. NCR 7052 58-KEY 7002 Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-13 ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the bar code special character ($ + % /) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, when Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled and a +B is scanned, it is interpreted as b, %J as ?, and %V as @. Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >. Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set 1 ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1001 $A CTRL A 1002 $B CTRL B 1003 $C CTRL C 1004 $D CTRL D 1005 $E CTRL E 1006 $F CTRL F 1007 $G CTRL G 1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 1010 $J CTRL J 1011 $K CTRL K 1012 $L CTRL L 1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1 1014 $N CTRL N 1015 $O CTRL O 1016 $P CTRL P 1017 $Q CTRL Q 1018 $R CTRL R 1019 $S CTRL S 1020 $T CTRL T 1021 $U CTRL U 1022 $V CTRL V 1023 $W CTRL W 1024 $X CTRL X 1025 $Y CTRL Y 1026 $Z CTRL Z 1027 %A CTRL [ /ESC1 The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 5-14 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1028 %B CTRL \ 1029 %C CTRL ] 1030 %D CTRL 6 1031 %E CTRL - 1032 Space Space 1033 /A ! 1034 /B “ 1035 /C # 1036 /D $ 1037 /E % 1038 /F & 1039 /G ‘ 1040 /H ( 1041 /I ) 1042 /J * 1043 /K + 1044 /L , 1045 - - 1046 . . 1047 /O / 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 /Z : 1059 %F ; 1060 %G < 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-15 Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1061 %H = 1062 %I > 1063 %J ? 1064 %V @ 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 I I 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 %K [ 1092 %L \ 1093 %M ] 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 5-16 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 5-2. Keyboard Wedge ASCII Character Set (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1094 %N ^ 1095 %O _ 1096 %W ‘ 1097 +A a 1098 +B b 1099 +C c 1100 +D d 1101 +E e 1102 +F f 1103 +G g 1104 +H h 1105 +I i 1106 +J j 1107 +K k 1108 +L l 1109 +M m 1110 +N n 1111 +O o 1112 +P p 1113 +Q q 1114 +R r 1115 +S s 1116 +T t 1117 +U u 1118 +V v 1119 +W w 1120 +X x 1121 +Y y 1122 +Z z 1123 %P { 1124 %Q | 1125 %R } 1126 %S ~ 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-17 Table 5-3. Keyboard Wedge ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2065 ALT A 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALT E 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT I 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set GUI Keys Keystrokes 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 5-18 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 5-4. Keyboard Wedge GIU Key Character Set (Continued) GUI Keys Keystrokes 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Keyboard Wedge Interface 5-19 Table 5-5. Keyboard Wedge F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 * 6043 + 6044 undefined 6045 - 6046 . 6047 / 5-20 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 5-6. Keyboard Wedge Numeric Keypad Character Set (Continued) Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Table 5-7. Keyboard Wedge Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow RS-232 Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Connecting an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 RS-232 Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 RS-232 Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 RS-232 Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Parity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Stop Bit Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Check Receive Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Hardware Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Software Handshaking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 RTS Line State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Intercharacter Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 ASCII Character Set for RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 6-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide RS-232 Interface 6-3 Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The RS-232 interface is used to connect the scanner to pointof-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port). If the host is not listed in Table 6-2, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication parameters to match the host. Note The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Symbol offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact the Symbol Global Customer Interaction Center for more information. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Baud Rate 57,600 Feature/Option Connecting an RS-232 Interface This connection is made directly from the scanner to the host computer. Interface Cable Serial Port Connector to Host Power Supply Cable Figure 6-1. RS-232 Direct Connection Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 6-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host. 3. Connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet. 4. Select the RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from RS-232 Host Types on page 6-7. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. 6-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide RS-232 Parameter Defaults Table 6-1 lists the defaults for RS-232 host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 6-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 6-1. RS-232 Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number RS-232 Host Types Standard 6-7 Baud Rate 9600 6-8 Parity Type None 6-9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format) 8-Bit 6-10 Check Receive Errors Enable 6-11 Hardware Handshaking None 6-12 Software Handshaking None 6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 6-14 RTS Line State Low RTS 6-15 Beep on Disable 6-15 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 6-17 RS-232 Host Parameters RS-232 Interface 6-5 RS-232 Host Parameters Various RS-232 hosts are set up with their own parameter default settings (Table 6-2). Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, Olivetti, Omron, or terminal sets the defaults listed below. Table 6-2. Terminal Specific RS-232 Parameter Standard (Default) ICL Fujitsu WincorNixdorf Mode A Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/OPOS Olivetti Omron Transmit Code ID No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Transmission Format Data as is Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Prefix/Data/Suffix Data/Suffix Suffix CR/LF (7013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013) Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 Parity None Even None Odd Odd Even None None RTS/CTS Option 3 None RTS/CTS Option 3 RTS/CTS Option 3 None None Software Handshaking None None None None None Ack/Nak None Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. Stop Bit Select One One One One One One One ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit Beep On Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Low High Low Low Low = No data to send Low High None None None None None STX (1003) None Hardware Handshaking RTS Line State Prefix Yes *In the Nixdorf Mode B, if CTS is Low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is High, the user can scan bar codes. **If Nixdorf Mode B is scanned without the scanner connected to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner. 6-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide RS-232 Host Parameters (continued) Selecting the ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS terminal enables the transmission of code ID characters listed in Table 6-3 below. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. The Transmit Code ID feature should not be enabled for these terminals. Table 6-3. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters ICL Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A Fujitsu Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B/OPOS Olivetti Omron UPC-A A A A A A A UPC-E E E C C C E EAN-8/JAN-8 FF FF B B B FF EAN-13/JAN-13 F F A A A F Code 39 C None M M M C Codabar N None N N N N Code 128 L None K K K L I 2 of 5 I None I I I I Code 93 None None L L L None D 2 of 5 H None H H H H UCC/EAN 128 L None P P P L MSI None None O O O None Bookland EAN F F A A A F Trioptic None None None None None None Code 11 None None None None None None IATA H None H H None None Code 32 None None None None None None RS-232 Interface 6-7 RS-232 Host Types To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following bar codes. *Standard RS-232 ICL RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B Olivetti ORS4500 Omron OPOS/JPOS Fujitsu RS-232 6-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form. Baud Rate 600 Baud Rate 1200 Baud Rate 2400 Baud Rate 4800 *Baud Rate 9600 Baud Rate 19,200 Baud Rate 38,400 RS-232 Interface 6-9 Parity A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. • • • • • Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. Select Mark parity and the parity bit is always 1. Select Space parity and the parity bit is always 0. Select None when no parity bit is required. Odd Even Mark Space *None 6-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Stop Bit Select The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. *1 Stop Bit 2 Stop Bits Data Bits (ASCII Format) This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol. 7-Bit *8-Bit RS-232 Interface 6-11 Check Receive Errors Select whether or not the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters are checked. The parity value of received characters is verified against the parity parameter selected above. *Check For Received Errors (Enable) Do Not Check For Received Errors (Disable) Hardware Handshaking The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is not selected, scan data is transmitted as it becomes available. If Standard RTS/CTS handshaking is selected, scan data is transmitted according to the following sequence: • • • • The scanner reads the CTS line for activity. If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to de-assert the CTS line. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and any scanned data is lost. When the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for the host to assert CTS. When the host asserts CTS, data is transmitted. If, after Host Serial Response Time-out, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error, and discards the data. When data transmission is complete, the scanner de-asserts RTS 10 msec after sending the last character. The host should respond by negating CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next transmission of data. During the transmission of data, the CTS line should be asserted. If CTS is de-asserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the transmission is aborted, the scanner sounds a transmission error, and the data is discarded. If the above communication sequence fails, the scanner issues an error indication. In this case, the data is lost and must be rescanned. If Hardware Handshaking and Software Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence. The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state. • • None: Scan the bar code below if no Hardware Handshaking is desired. Standard RTS/CTS: Scan the bar code below to select Standard RTS/CTS Hardware Handshaking. 6-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide • • • RTS/CTS Option 1: When RTS/CTS Option 1 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when the transmission is complete. RTS/CTS Option 2: When Option 2 is selected, RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner waits for CTS to be asserted before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. RTS/CTS Option 3: When Option 3 is selected, the scanner asserts RTS prior to any data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. The scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for CTS to be asserted. If CTS is not asserted during this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission is complete. *None Standard RTS/CTS RTS/CTS Option 1 RTS/CTS Option 2 RTS/CTS Option 3 RS-232 Interface 6-13 Software Handshaking This parameter offers control of the data transmission process in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. There are five options. If Software Handshaking and Hardware Handshaking are both enabled, Hardware Handshaking takes precedence. • • • • • None: When this option is selected, data is transmitted immediately. No response is expected from host. ACK/NAK: When this option is selected, after transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. When a NAK is received, the scanner transmits the same data again and waits for either an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data when NAKs are received, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Time-out to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it issues an error indication and discards the data. There are no retries when a time-out occurs. ENQ: When this option is selected, the scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If an ENQ is not received within the Host Serial Response Time-out, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Time-out to prevent transmission errors. ACK/NAK with ENQ: This combines the two previous options. For re-transmissions of data, due to a NAK from the host, an additional ENQ is not required. XON/XOFF: An XOFF character turns the scanner transmission off until the scanner receives an XON character. There are two situations for XON/XOFF: • XOFF is received before the scanner has data to send. When the scanner has data to send, it waits up to Host Serial Response Time-out for an XON character before transmission. If the XON is not received within this time, the scanner issues an error indication and discards the data. • XOFF is received during a transmission. Data transmission then stops after sending the current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data message. The scanner waits up to 30 seconds for the XON. *None ACK/NAK ENQ 6-14 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Software Handshaking (continued) ACK/NAK with ENQ XON/XOFF Host Serial Response Time-out This parameter specifies how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, ENQ, XON, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. *Minimum: 2 Sec Low: 2.5 Sec Medium: 5 Sec RS-232 Interface 6-15 Host Serial Response Time-out (continued) High: 7.5 Sec Maximum: 9.9 Sec RTS Line State This parameter sets the idle state of the Serial Host RTS line. Scan a bar code below to select Low RTS or High RTS line state. *Host: Low RTS Host: High RTS Beep on When this parameter is enabled, the scanner issues a beep when a character is detected on the RS-232 serial line. is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event. Beep On Character (Enable) *Do Not Beep On Character (Disable) 6-16 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions. *Minimum: 0 msec Low: 25 msec Medium: 50 msec High: 75 msec Maximum: 99 msec RS-232 Interface 6-17 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options When Nixdorf Mode B is selected, this indicates when the scanner should beep and turn on its LED after a decode. *Normal Operation (Beep/LED immediately after decode) Beep/LED After Transmission Beep/LED After CTS Pulse Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character and then an error beep sounds on the scanner. *Send Bar Code with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters 6-18 LS4208 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for RS-232 The values in Table 6-4 can be assigned as prefixes or suffixes for ASCII character data transmission. Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1000 %U NUL 1001 $A SOH 1002 $B STX 1003 $C ETX 1004 $D EOT 1005 $E ENQ 1006 $F ACK 1007 $G BELL 1008 $H BCKSPC 1009 $I HORIZ TAB 1010 $J LF/NW LN 1011 $K VT 1012 $L FF 1013 $M CR/ENTER 1014 $N SO 1015 $O SI 1016 $P DLE 1017 $Q DC1/XON 1018 $R DC2 1019 $S DC3/XOFF 1020 $T DC4 1021 $U NAK 1022 $V SYN 1023 $W ETB 1024 $X CAN 1025 $Y EM 1026 $Z SUB 1027 %A ESC 1028 %B FS 1029 %C GS 1030 %D RS 1031 %E US 1032 Space Space RS-232 Interface 6-19 Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1033 /A ! 1034 /B " 1035 /C # 1036 /D $ 1037 /E % 1038 /F & 1039 /G ‘ 1040 /H ( 1041 /I ) 1042 /J * 1043 /K + 1044 /L , 1045 - - 1046 . . 1047 /O / 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1057 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 /Z : 1059 %F ; 1060 %G < 1061 %H = 1062 %I > 1063 %J ? 1064 %V @ 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 6-20 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 I I 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 %K [ 1092 %L \ 1093 %M ] 1094 %N ^ 1095 %O _ 1096 %W ` 1097 +A a 1098 +B b 1099 +C c 1100 +D d 1101 +E e 1102 +F f RS-232 Interface 6-21 Table 6-4. ASCII Character Set for RS-232 (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character ASCII Character 1103 +G g 1104 +H h 1105 +I i 1106 +J j 1107 +K k 1108 +L l 1109 +M m 1110 +N n 1111 +O o 1112 +P p 1113 +Q q 1114 +R r 1115 +S s 1116 +T t 1117 +U u 1118 +V v 1119 +W w 1120 +X x 1121 +Y y 1122 +Z z 1123 %P { 1124 %Q | 1125 %R } 1126 %S ~ 1127 Undefined 7013 ENTER 6-22 LS4208 Product Reference Guide USB Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Connecting a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 USB Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 USB Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 USB Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 USB Keystroke Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Emulate Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Function Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Simulated Caps Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Convert Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 ASCII Character Set for USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 7-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide USB Interface 7-3 Introduction This chapter covers the connection and setup of the scanner to a USB host. The scanner attaches directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, and is powered by it. No additional power supply is required. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *North American Standard USB Keyboard Feature/Option Connecting a USB Interface Interface cable USB Series A Connector Figure 7-1. USB Connection The scanner connects with USB capable hosts including: • • • • Desktop PCs and Notebooks Apple™ iMac, G4, iBooks (North America only) IBM SurePOS terminals Sun, IBM, and other network computers that support more than one keyboard. The following operating systems support the scanner through USB: • • • Windows 98, 2000, ME, XP MacOS 8.5 and above IBM 4690 OS. The scanner will also interface with other USB hosts which support USB Human Interface Devices (HID). For more information on USB technology, hosts, and peripheral devices, visit www.symbol.com/usb. 7-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide To set up the scanner: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 7-1are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. Attach the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the Plus Power connector in an available port of the IBM SurePOS terminal. 3. Select the USB device type by scanning the appropriate bar code from USB Device Type on page 7-5. 4. On first installation when using Windows, the software prompts to select or install the Human Interface Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next through all the choices and click Finished on the last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation. 5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 3-3. USB Parameter Defaults Table 7-1 lists the defaults for USB host parameters. If any option needs to be changed, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 7-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 7-1. USB Host Default Table Parameter Default Page Number USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 7-6 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 7-9 Emulate Keypad Disable 7-9 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 7-10 Function Key Mapping Disable 7-10 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 7-11 Convert Case No Case Conversion 7-11 USB Host Parameters USB Interface 7-5 USB Host Parameters USB Device Type Select the desired USB device type. When changing USB Device Types, the scanner automatically restarts. The scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences. *HID Keyboard Emulation IBM Table Top USB IBM Hand-Held USB USB OPOS Handheld 7-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) Scan the bar code corresponding to the keyboard type. This setting applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets. The scanner issues the standard startup beep sequences. *North American Standard USB Keyboard German Windows French Windows French Canadian Windows 95/98 French Canadian Windows 2000/XP Spanish Windows USB Interface 7-7 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes continued) Italian Windows Swedish Windows UK English Windows Japanese Windows (ASCII) Portuguese-Brazilian Windows 7-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide USB Keystroke Delay This parameter sets the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Scan a bar code below to increase the delay when hosts require a slower transmission of data. *No Delay Medium Delay (20 msec) Long Delay (40 msec) USB CAPS Lock Override This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, the case of the data is preserved regardless of the state of the caps lock key. This setting is always enabled for the “Japanese, Windows (ASCII)” keyboard type and can not be disabled. Override Caps Lock Key (Enable) *Do Not Override Caps Lock Key (Disable) USB Interface 7-9 USB Ignore Unknown Characters This option applies only to the HID Keyboard Emulation device and IBM device. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar code data is sent up to the first unknown character, then the scanner issues an error beep. *Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes with Unknown Characters Emulate Keypad When enabled, all characters are sent as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad. For example ASCII A would be sent as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break.” *Disable Keypad Emulation Enable Keypad Emulation 7-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide USB Keyboard FN 1 Substitution This option applies only to the USB HID Keyboard Emulation device. When enabled, this allows replacement of any FN 1 characters in an EAN 128 bar code with a Key Category and value chosen by the user (see FN1 Substitution Values on page 13-8 to set the Key Category and Key Value). Enable FN1 Substitution *Disable FN1 Substitution Function Key Mapping ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequences (see Table 7-2 on page 7-12). When this parameter is enabled, the keys in bold are sent in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not this parameter is enabled. *Disable Function Key Mapping Enable Function Key Mapping USB Interface 7-11 Simulated Caps Lock When enabled, the scanner will invert upper and lower case characters on the scanner bar code as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion is done regardless of the current state of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state. *Disable Simulated Caps Lock Enable Simulated Caps Lock Convert Case When enabled, the scanner will convert all bar code data to the selected case. *No Case Conversion Convert All to Upper Case Convert All to Lower Case 7-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide ASCII Character Set for USB Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1000 %U CTRL 2 1001 $A CTRL A 1002 $B CTRL B 1003 $C CTRL C 1004 $D CTRL D 1005 $E CTRL E 1006 $F CTRL F 1007 $G CTRL G 1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 1010 $J CTRL J 1011 $K CTRL K 1012 $L CTRL L 1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1 1014 $N CTRL N 1015 $O CTRL O 1016 $P CTRL P 1017 $Q CTRL Q 1018 $R CTRL R 1019 $S CTRL S 1020 $T CTRL T 1021 $U CTRL U 1022 $V CTRL V 1023 $W CTRL W 1024 $X CTRL X 1025 $Y CTRL Y 1026 $Z CTRL Z 1027 %A CTRL [/ESC1 1028 %B CTRL \ 1029 %C CTRL ] 1030 %D CTRL 6 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. USB Interface 7-13 Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1031 %E CTRL - 1032 Space Space 1033 /A ! 1034 /B “ 1035 /C # 1036 /D $ 1037 /E % 1038 /F & 1039 /G ‘ 1040 /H ( 1041 /I ) 1042 /J * 1043 /K + 1044 /L , 1045 - - 1046 . . 1047 /O / 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 /Z : 1059 %F ; 1060 %G < 1061 %H = 1062 %I > 1063 %J ? 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 7-14 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1064 %V @ 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 I I 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 %K [ 1092 %L \ 1093 %M ] 1094 %N ^ 1095 %O _ 1096 %W ` 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. USB Interface 7-15 Table 7-2. ASCII Character Set for USB (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1097 +A a 1098 +B b 1099 +C c 1100 +D d 1101 +E e 1102 +F f 1103 +G g 1104 +H h 1105 +I i 1106 +J j 1107 +K k 1108 +L l 1109 +M m 1110 +N n 1111 +O o 1112 +P p 1113 +Q q 1114 +R r 1115 +S s 1116 +T t 1117 +U u 1118 +V v 1119 +W w 1120 +X x 1121 +Y y 1122 +Z z 1123 %P { 1124 %Q | 1125 %R } 1126 %S ~ 1The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. 7-16 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 7-3. USB ALT Key Character Set ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALT A 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALT E 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT I 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z USB Interface 7-17 Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set GUI Key Keystroke 3000 Right Control Key 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. 7-18 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 7-4. USB GUI Key Character Set (Continued) GUI Key Keystroke 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. Table 7-5. USB F Key Character Set F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F10 5011 F11 5012 F12 5013 F13 5014 F14 5015 F15 5016 F16 5017 F17 5018 F18 5019 F19 5020 F20 5021 F21 5022 F22 5023 F23 5024 F24 USB Interface 7-19 Table 7-6. USB Numeric Keypad Character Set Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 * 6043 + 6044 undefined 6045 - 6046 . 6047 / 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock 7-20 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 7-7. USB Extended Keypad Character Set Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 PgUp 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Down Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow IBM Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 IBM Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Port Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Optional IBM Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Ignore Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide IBM Interface 8-3 Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Disable Convert to Code Feature/Option 39 Connecting to an IBM 468X/469X Host This connection is made directly from the scanner to the host interface. Interface cable Host Port Connector Figure 8-1. IBM Direct Connection Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 8-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9). 3. Select the port address by scanning the appropriate bar code from Port Address on page 8-5. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. The only required configuration is the port number. Other scanner parameters are typically controlled by the IBM system. 8-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide IBM Parameter Defaults Table 8-1 lists the defaults for IBM host parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Parameter Descriptions section beginning on page 8-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 8-1. IBM Host Default Table Default Page Number Port Address None Selected 8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 8-6 Ignore Beep Disable 8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 8-7 Parameter IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters IBM Interface IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Port Address This parameter sets the IBM 468X/469X port used. Scanning one of these bar codes enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner. * None Selected Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)1 Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) 1 User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. 8-5 8-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Convert Unknown to Code 39 Scan a bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of unknown bar code type data to Code 39. Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39 *Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39 IBM Interface 8-7 Optional IBM Parameters If you configure the scanner and find the settings were not saved, or changed, when the system is restarted scan the bar codes that follow to override IBM interface defaults. Scan a bar code below after setting defaults and before configuring the scanner. Ignore Beep The host can send a beep request to the scanner. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed. *Disable Enable Ignore Bar Code Configuration The host has the ability to enable/disable code types. When this parameter is enabled, the request is not sent to the attached scanner. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS485 host as if it were processed. *Disable Enable 8-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Connecting Using Wand Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Wand Emulation Host Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Wand Emulation Host Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Interface 9-3 Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a wand emulation host when Wand Emulation communication is needed. The scanner connects to an external wand decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. In this mode the scanner emulates the signal of a wand to make it "readable" by a wand decoder. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Transmit Unknown Char- Feature/Option acters Connecting Using Wand Emulation To perform Wand Emulation, connect the scanner to a portable data terminal, or a controller which collects the wand data and interprets it for the host. Mobile Computer Wand Port Interface Cable Figure 9-1. Wand Emulation Connection Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 9-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. the modular connector of the Wand Emulation interface cable to cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the Wand Emulation interface cable to the wand port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Select the Wand Emulation host type by scanning the appropriate bar code from Wand Emulation Host Types on page 9-5. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. Connect the scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the scanner to a 12 volt decoder can damage the scanner and invalidate the warranty. WARNING 9-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Wand Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 9-1 lists the defaults for Wand Emulation host types. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in Wand Emulation Host Parameters beginning on page page 9-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 9-1. Wand Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 9-5 Leading Margin 80 msec 9-6 Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 9-9 Wand Emulation Host Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Wand Emulation Interface 9-5 Wand Emulation Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Types Select a Wand Emulation host by scanning one of the bar codes below. Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 Symbol PDT Terminal (MSI) Symbol PTC Terminal (Telxon) 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. 9-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin (Quiet Zone) Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. A leading margin is the time that precedes the first bar of the scan, (in milliseconds). The minimum allowed value is 80 msec and the maximum is 250 msec. This parameter accommodates older wand decoders which cannot handle short leading margins. 250 msec is the maximum value that this parameter can attain, however, 200 msec is sufficient. *80 msec 140 msec 200 msec Wand Emulation Interface 9-7 Polarity Scan a bar code below to select the polarity required by the decoder. Polarity determines how the scanner's Wand Emulation interface creates the Digitized Barcode Pattern (DBP). DBP is a digital signal that represents the scanned bar code. Different decoders expect the DBP to be in a certain format. The DBP either has the "highs" represent bars and the "lows" represent spaces (margins), or the "highs" represent spaces (margins) and the "lows" represent bars. *Bar High/Margin Low Bar Low/Margin High Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound on the scanner. When Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the host, and the scanner emits an error beep. *Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters Do Not Send Bar Codes With Unknown Characters 9-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 By default, the Wand Emulation interface sends data to the attached host in the same symbology that was decoded. This can be a problem for customers with older systems that do not recognize newer symbologies (for example, RSS). Enabling this parameter ignores the original symbology decoded, and outputs the data as if it were a Code 39 bar code. Any lowercase characters in the original data stream are transmitted as uppercase characters. This also allows ADF rules. If Ignore Unknown Characters is enabled, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If Ignore Unknown Characters is disabled, if any characters that do not have a corresponding character are encountered, the scanner emits an error beep and no data is transmitted. ADF Note: By default, the Wand Emulation interface does not allow scanned data to be processed by ADF rules. Enabling this parameter has the side effect of allowing the scanned data to be processed by the ADF rules (see Chapter 14, Advanced Data Formatting). Enable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host *Disable Convert to Code 39 for Wand Host Wand Emulation Interface 9-9 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the wand interface is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. This setting requires that the host be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled. *Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Enable Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 9-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Interface Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Connecting Using Scanner Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Scanner Emulation Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Scanner Emulation Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Beep Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Parameter Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Convert Newer Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Module Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Leading Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Check For Decode LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 10-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Interface 10-3 Introduction This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a Scanner Emulation host. Use this mode when Scanner Emulation communication is needed. In this mode, the scanner connects to an external decoder or to a decoder integrated in a mobile computer or Point-of-Sale (POS) terminal. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Parameter Process and Feature/Option Pass-Through Connecting Using Scanner Emulation To perform Scanner Emulation, connect the scanner to a mobile computer, or a controller which collects the data and interprets it for the host. Interface Cable Host Port Connector Figure 10-1. Scanner Emulation Connection Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 10-1 are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner remain the same. 1. Attach the modular connector of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner (see Installing the Interface Cable on page 1-4). 2. Connect the other end of the Scanner Emulation interface cable to the scanner port on the mobile computer or controller. 3. Scan the Scanner Emulation host bar code from Scanner Emulation Host on page 10-5 to enable the Scanner Emulation host interface. 4. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate bar codes in this chapter. Connect the scanner to 5 volt decoders only. Connecting the scanner to a 12 volt decoder can damage the scanner and invalidate the warranty. WARNING 10-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Scanner Emulation Parameter Defaults Table 10-1 lists the defaults for the Scanner Emulation host. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Scanner Emulation Host Parameters section beginning on page page 10-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 10-1. Scanner Emulation Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 10-5 Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 10-6 Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 10-6 Module Width 20 µs 10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 10-7 Transmission Timeout 3 Sec 10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 10-9 Leading Margin 2 ms 10-9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 10-10 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Scanner Emulation Interface 10-5 Scanner Emulation Host Scan the bar code below to enable the Scanner Emulation host. Undecoded Scanner Emulation Host Scanner Emulation Host Parameters Beep Style The Scanner Emulation host supports three beep styles. • • • Beep On Successful Transmit: The scanner beeps when the attached decoder issues the decode signal to the scanner, so the scanner and the attached decoder beep at the same time. Beep At Decode Time: The scanner beeps upon decode. This results in a double beep sequence from most decoders, since the scanner beeps, and the decoder beeps (at a different frequency) when it successfully decodes the output. Do Not Beep: Only the attached decoder issues the decode beep. *Beep On Successful Transmit Beep At Decode Time Do Not Beep 10-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Parameter Pass-Through The Scanner Emulation host can process parameter bar code messages and send them to the attached decoder. In this way, customers using Symbol compliant decoders can control the behavior of the entire system by scanning the necessary parameters only once. For example, to enable D 2 of 5, scan the D 2 of 5 Enable parameter bar code. The scanner and the attached decoder both process the parameter. *Parameter Process and Pass-Through Parameter Process Only Convert Newer Code Types The scanner supports a variety of code types that are not decodable by attached decoder systems. To allow compatibility in these environments, the scanner converts these code types to more commonly decodable symbologies, as per the following chart. Symbologies not listed on this chart are transmitted normally. Scan this code type: Transmitted as: Code 11 Code 39 Chinese 2 of 5 Code 39 RSS (14, Limited, and Expanded) Code 128 Coupon Code Code 128 When decoding these code types with this parameter disabled, the scanner issues Convert Error beeps and transmits no data. *Convert Newer Code Types Reject Newer Code Types Scanner Emulation Interface 10-7 Module Width The standard module width is 20 µs. For an extremely slow decoder system, select 50 µs Module Width. *20 µs Module Width 50 µs Module Width Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Scan the bar code below to enable or disable the conversion of all bar code data to Code 39. *Do Not Convert Bar Codes To Code 39 Convert All To Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion By default, any characters that do not have a corresponding character in the Code 39 symbology set are replaced by a space. If this parameter is enabled, the data sent to the Scanner Emulation host is encoded in Code 39 Full ASCII. The host must be able to interpret Code 39 Full ASCII data. This setting applies only if Convert to Code 39 is also enabled. *Disable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII Enable Convert Code 39 To Full ASCII 10-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Transmission Timeout The Scanner Emulation host transmits bar code data to the attached decoder and waits for the decoder to assert the Decode signal, indicating successful transmission. If, after a specified amount of time, the Decode signal is not asserted (indicating that the attached decoder has not successfully received the bar code data), the scanner issues transmit error beeps. Scan a bar code below to select the desired transmission timeout. *3 Second Transmission Timeout 4 Second Transmission Timeout 5 Second Transmission Timeout 10 Second Transmission Timeout 30 Second Transmission Timeout Scanner Emulation Interface 10-9 Ignore Unknown Characters Unknown characters are characters the decoder does not recognize. When Ignore Unknown Characters is selected, all bar code data is sent except for unknown characters, and no error beeps sound. When Convert Error on Unknown Characters is selected, bar codes containing at least one unknown character are not sent to the decoder, and a convert error beep sounds. *Ignore Unknown Characters Convert Error On Unknown Characters Leading Margin Scan a bar code below to select a leading margin duration. 1 ms Leading Margin *2 ms Leading Margin 3 ms Leading Margin 10-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Leading Margin (continued) 5 ms Leading Margin 10 ms Leading Margin Check For Decode LED The attached decoder normally asserts the Decode line to signal to the Scanner Emulation host that it successfully decoded the transmitted bar code. Some decoders, however, do not assert the Decode signal. In this case, the scanner emits transmit error beeps to indicate that the bar code was not successfully transmitted. Scan the Ignore Decode LED bar code to disable the Transmit Error beeps. *Check For Decode LED Ignore Decode LED 123Scan Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Communication with 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 123Scan Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide 123Scan 11-3 Introduction 123Scan is a Windows®-based utility that programs the scanner with all parameters including ADF rules. An ADF rule modifies bar code data before it is sent to the host to ensure compatibility between bar coded data and the host application. Scanners can be programmed via PC download or by scanning a sheet of bar codes generated by the utility. Scanner programming is saved in a file for electronic distribution. The 123Scan program includes a help file. Communication with 123Scan To communicate with the 123Scan program which runs on a host computer running a Windows operating system, use an RS-232 cable to connect the scanner to the host computer (seeConnecting an RS-232 Interface on page 6-3). 123Scan requirements: • • • Host computer with Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP Scanner RS-232 cable. 123Scan Parameter To communicate with the 123Scan program, load 123Scan, included in the documentation CD-ROM, onto the host computer, and scan the bar code below. Refer to 123Scan instructions for programming the scanner. Scan the bar code below to enable the 123Scan interface on the scanner. 123Scan Configuration 11-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Symbologies Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Symbology Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Enable/Disable UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-A Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-E Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 UPC-E1 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 Bookland ISBN Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Enable/Disable ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 12-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Code 32 Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-22 Set Lengths for Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Enable/Disable Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Set Lengths for Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-39 Codabar (NW - 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Enable/Disable Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 CLSI Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-41 NOTIS Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-42 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Enable/Disable MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 Set Lengths for MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 MSI Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-45 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-47 Symbology - Specific Security Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Redundancy Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 Security Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50 Intercharacter Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51 Report Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report MIMIC Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Report Synapse Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-52 Symbologies 12-3 Introduction This chapter describes symbology features and provides the programming bar codes for selecting these features. Before programming, follow the instructions in Chapter 1, Getting Started. The scanner is shipped with the settings shown in the Symbology Parameter Defaults on page 12-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan the appropriate default bar code on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Enable UPC-A Feature/Option Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases, scanning one bar code sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit bar code data without the UPC-A check digit, simply scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit bar code under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 12-13. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry. Other parameters, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, require scanning several bar codes. See the individual parameter, such as Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5, for this procedure. Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. 12-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Symbology Parameter Defaults Table 12-1 lists the defaults for all symbologies parameters. To change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Symbologies Parameters section beginning on 12-7. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults Parameter Default Page Number UPC-A Enable 12-7 UPC-E Enable 12-7 UPC-E1 Disable 12-8 EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable 12-8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable 12-8 Bookland EAN Disable 12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Ignore 12-10 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7 12-13 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable 12-13 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable 12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable 12-14 UPC-A Preamble System Character 12-14 UPC-E Preamble System Character 12-14 UPC-E1 Preamble System Character 12-16 Convert UPC-E to A Disable 12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable 12-17 EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable 12-17 Bookland ISBN Format ISBN-10 12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable 12-18 Code 128 Enable 12-19 UCC/EAN-128 Enable 12-19 ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Enable 12-20 Code 39 Enable 12-21 Trioptic Code 39 Disable 12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable 12-22 Code 32 Prefix Disable 12-22 UPC/EAN Code 128 Code 39 Symbologies 12-5 Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55 12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-24 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12-25 Buffer Code 39 Disable 12-25 Code 93 Disable 12-29 Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55 12-29 Code 11 Disable 12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55 12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Disable 12-33 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable 12-34 Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14 12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 Disable 12-37 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 12 12-37 Disable 12-39 Codabar Disable 12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55 12-40 CLSI Editing Disable 12-41 NOTIS Editing Disable 12-42 MSI Disable 12-43 Set Length(s) for MSI 2 to 55 12-43 MSI Check Digits One 12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable 12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10/Mod 10 12-45 Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) MSI 12-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table 12-1. Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number RSS 14 Disable 12-46 RSS Limited Disable 12-46 RSS Expanded Disable 12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN Disable 12-47 Redundancy Level 1 12-48 Security Levels 0 12-50 Bi-directional Redundancy Disable 12-51 Intercharacter Gap Normal Intercharacter Gap 12-51 RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Symbology - Specific Security Levels Report Version 12-52 Report MIMIC Version 12-52 Report Synapse Cable 12-52 Symbologies 12-7 UPC/EAN Enable/Disable UPC-A/UPC-E To enable or disable UPC-A or UPC-E, scan the appropriate bar code below. *Enable UPC-A Disable UPC-A *Enable UPC-E Disable UPC-E 12-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Enable/Disable UPC-E1 UPC-E1 is disabled by default. To enable or disable UPC-E1, scan the appropriate bar code below. UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology. Enable UPC-E1 *Disable UPC-E1 Enable/Disable EAN-13/EAN-8 To enable or disable EAN-13 or EAN-8, scan the appropriate bar code below. *Enable EAN-13 Disable EAN-13 *Enable EAN-8 Disable EAN-8 Symbologies 12-9 Enable/Disable Bookland EAN To enable or disable Bookland EAN, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Bookland EAN *Disable Bookland EAN If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-18. Also select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/ EAN/JAN Supplementals. Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals Supplementals are additionally appended characters (2 or 5) according to specific code format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN 8+2). The following options are available: • • • • If you select Ignore UPC/EAN with Supplementals, and the scanner is presented with a UPC/EAN plus supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN and ignores the supplemental characters. If you select Decode UPC/EAN with Supplementals, the scanner only decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals. If you select Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. If you select one of the following Supplemental Mode options, the scanner immediately transmits EAN-13 bar codes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the bar code the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 12-13 before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN bar codes that do not have that prefix immediately. • Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode • Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN bar codes, see Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN Format on page 12-18. • Enable 977 Supplemental Mode • Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode • Enable 491 Supplemental Mode 12-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide • • • Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously. • Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with a 3-digit user-defined prefix. Set this 3-digit prefix using Supplemental User-Programmable 1. • Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with either of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the 3-digit prefixes using Supplemental User-Programmable 1 and Supplemental UserProgrammable 2. • Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or the user-defined prefix set using Supplemental User-Programmable 1. • Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - applies to EAN-13 bar codes starting with any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using Supplemental User-Programmable 1 and Supplemental User-Programmable 2. Select Supplemental User-Programmable 1 to set a 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. Select Supplemental User-Programmable 2 to set a second 3-digit prefix. Then select the 3 digits using the numeric bar codes beginning on page D-1. To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters. *Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Only With Supplementals Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode Symbologies 12-11 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued) Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode Enable 977 Supplemental Mode Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode Enable 491 Supplemental Mode Enable Smart Supplemental Mode Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 12-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued) Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 Supplemental User-Programmable 1 Supplemental User-Programmable 2 Symbologies 12-13 UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy With Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals or one of the supplemental modes selected, this option adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission. The range is from 2 to 22 times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals, and the autodiscriminate option is selected. The default is set at 7. Scan the bar code below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. Single digit numbers must have a leading zero. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy Transmit UPC-A Check Digit The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data. *Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Transmit UPC-E Check Digit The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data. *Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 12-14 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit the bar code data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data. *Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit UPC-A Preamble Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-A preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system. No Preamble () *System Character ( ) System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> ) Symbologies 12-15 UPC-E Preamble Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system. No Preamble () *System Character ( ) System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> ) 12-16 LS4208 Product Reference Guide UPC-E1 Preamble Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol consisting of Country Code and System Character. Three options are given for transmitting UPC-E1 preamble to the host device: transmit System Character only, transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA), and no preamble transmitted. Scan a bar code below to match the host system. No Preamble () *System Character ( ) System Character & Country Code (< COUNTRY CODE> ) Convert UPC-E to UPC-A Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). When disabled, UPC-E decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E data, without conversion. Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable) *Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable) Symbologies 12-17 Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A Enable this to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit). When disabled, UPC-E1 decoded data is transmitted as UPC-E1 data, without conversion. Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) *Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend When enabled, this parameter adds five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. When disabled, EAN-8 symbols are transmitted as is. Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend *Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend 12-18 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Bookland ISBN Format If you enabled Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9, select one of the following formats for Bookland data: • • Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered Bookland in this mode. Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in 13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol. *Bookland ISBN-10 Bookland ISBN-13 For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Enable/Disable Bookland EAN on page 12-9, then select either Decode UPC/EAN Supplementals, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode in Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 12-9. UCC Coupon Extended Code When enabled, this parameter decodes UPCA bar codes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 bar codes starting with digit ‘99’, and UPCA/ EAN-128 Coupon Codes. UPCA, EAN-13 and EAN-128 must be enabled to scan all types of Coupon Codes. Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code *Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code Use the Decode UPC/EAN Supplemental Redundancy parameter to control autodiscrimination of the EAN128 (right half) of a coupon code. Symbologies 12-19 Code 128 Enable/Disable Code 128 To enable or disable Code 128, scan the appropriate bar code below. *Enable Code 128 Disable Code 128 Enable/Disable UCC/EAN-128 To enable or disable UCC/EAN-128, scan the appropriate bar code below. *Enable UCC/EAN-128 Disable UCC/EAN-128 12-20 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Enable/Disable ISBT 128 ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable ISBT 128. If necessary, the host must perform concatenation of the ISBT data. *Enable ISBT 128 Disable ISBT 128 Symbologies 12-21 Code 39 Enable/Disable Code 39 To enable or disable Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below. *Enable Code 39 Disable Code 39 Enable/Disable Trioptic Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. To enable or disable Trioptic Code 39, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Trioptic Code 39 *Disable Trioptic Code 39 Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously. 12-22 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32. Code 39 must be enabled for this parameter to function. . Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 *Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 Prefix Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 bar codes. Convert Code 39 to Code 32 must be enabled for this parameter to function. Enable Code 32 Prefix *Disable Code 32 Prefix Symbologies 12-23 Set Lengths for Code 39 he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 39 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within a Range or Any Length are the preferred options. When setting lengths for different bar code types by scanning single digit numbers, single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 39 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 39 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 39 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Select this option to decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Code 39 - One Discrete Length Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 39 - Length Within Range Code 39 - Any Length 12-24 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Code 39 Check Digit Verification When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded. Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit. Enable Code 39 Check Digit *Disable Code 39 Check Digit Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit. Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable) *Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable) Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function. Symbologies 12-25 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 39 Full ASCII *Disable Code 39 Full ASCII Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII cannot be enabled simultaneously. Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent and is described in the ASCII Character Set table for the appropriate interface. See ASCII Character Set for Keyboard Wedge on page 5-13, ASCII Character Set for RS-232 on page 6-18 and ASCII Character Set for USB on page 7-12 for the appropriate interface. Code 39 Buffering (Scan & Store) This feature allows the scanner to accumulate data from multiple Code 39 symbols. Selecting the Scan and Store option (Buffer Code 39) temporarily buffers all Code 39 symbols having a leading space as a first character for later transmission. The leading space is not buffered. Decode of a valid Code 39 symbol with no leading space causes transmission in sequence of all buffered data in a first-in first-out format, plus transmission of the “triggering” symbol. See the following pages for further details. When the Do Not Buffer Code 39 option is selected, all decoded Code 39 symbols are transmitted immediately without being stored in the buffer. 12-26 LS4208 Product Reference Guide This feature affects Code 39 only. If selecting Buffer Code 39, we recommend configuring the scanner to decode Code 39 symbology only. Buffer Code 39 (Enable) *Do Not Buffer Code 39 (Disable) While there is data in the transmission buffer, selecting Do Not Buffer Code 39 is not allowed. The buffer holds 200 bytes of information. To disable Code 39 buffering when there is data in the transmission buffer, first force the buffer transmission (see Transmit Buffer on page 12-27) or clear the buffer. Buffer Data To buffer data, Code 39 buffering must be enabled and a Code 39 symbol must be read with a space immediately following the start pattern. • • • Unless the data overflows the transmission buffer, the scanner issues a low/high beep to indicate successful decode and buffering. (For overflow conditions, see Overfilling Transmission Buffer.) The scanner adds the decoded data excluding the leading space to the transmission buffer. No transmission occurs. Symbologies 12-27 Clear Transmission Buffer To clear the transmission buffer, scan the Clear Buffer bar code below, which contains only a start character, a dash (minus), and a stop character. • • • The scanner issues a short high/low/high beep. The scanner erases the transmission buffer. No transmission occurs. Clear Buffer Because the Clear Buffer contains only the dash (minus) character, set the Code 39 length to include length 1 before scanning this bar code. Transmit Buffer There are two methods to transmit the Code 39 buffer. 1. Scan the Transmit Buffer bar code below which contains only a start character, a plus (+), and a stop character. • The scanner transmits and clears the buffer. • The scanner issues a low/high beep. Transmit Buffer 2. Scan a Code 39 bar code with a leading character other than a space. • The scanner appends new decode data to buffered data. • The scanner transmits and clears the buffer. • The scanner signals that the buffer was transmitted with a low/high beep. • Scanner transmits and clears the buffer. Because the Transmit Buffer contains only a plus (+) character, set the Code 39 length to include length 1 before scanning this bar code. 12-28 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Overfilling Transmission Buffer The Code 39 buffer holds 200 characters. If the symbol just read results in an overflow of the transmission buffer: • • The scanner indicates that the symbol was rejected by issuing three long, high beeps. No transmission occurs. The data in the buffer is not affected. Attempt to Transmit an Empty Buffer If the symbol just read was the Transmit Buffer symbol and the Code 39 buffer is empty: • • • A short low/high/low beep signals that the buffer is empty. No transmission occurs. The buffer remains empty. Symbologies 12-29 Code 93 Enable/Disable Code 93 To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 93 *Disable Code 93 Set Lengths for Code 93 The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 93 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 93 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 93 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability. 12-30 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued) Code 93 - One Discrete Length Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 93 - Length Within Range Code 93 - Any Length Symbologies 12-31 Code 11 Code 11 To enable or disable Code 11, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Code 11 *Disable Code 11 Set Lengths for Code 11 The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those Code 11 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Code 11 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Code 11 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. 12-32 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued) Code 11 - One Discrete Length Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths Code 11 - Length Within Range Code 11 - Any Length Symbologies 12-33 Code 11 Check Digit Verification This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm. This selects the check digit mechanism for the decoded Code 11 bar code. The options are to check for one check digit, check for two check digits, or disable the feature. To enable this feature, scan the bar code below corresponding to the number of check digits encoded in your Code 11 symbols. *Disable One Check Digit Two Check Digits Transmit Code 11 Check Digits This feature selects whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s). Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable) *Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable) Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function. 12-34 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable/Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 To enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below, and select an Interleaved 2 of 5 length from the following pages. *Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those I 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode an I 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Note Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications. Symbologies 12-35 Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued) I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range I 2 of 5 - Any Length I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification When this feature is enabled, the scanner checks the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm. *Disable USS Check Digit OPCC Check Digit 12-36 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit. Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable) *Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable) Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 Enable this parameter to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit. Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) *Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable) Symbologies 12-37 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Enable/Disable Discrete 2 of 5 To enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Discrete 2 of 5 *Disable Discrete 2 of 5 Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 he length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only those D 2 of 5 symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a D 2 of 5 symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Note Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications. 12-38 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued) D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range D 2 of 5 - Any Length Symbologies 12-39 Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 To enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Chinese 2 of 5 *Disable Chinese 2 of 5 12-40 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Codabar (NW - 7) Enable/Disable Codabar To enable or disable Codabar, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable Codabar *Disable Codabar Set Lengths for Codabar The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a Codabar symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan Codabar - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Symbologies 12-41 Set Lengths for Codabar (continued). Codabar - One Discrete Length Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths Codabar - Length Within Range Codabar - Any Length CLSI Editing When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if your host system requires this data format. Symbol length does not include start and stop characters. Enable CLSI Editing *Disable CLSI Editing 12-42 LS4208 Product Reference Guide NOTIS Editing When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol. Enable this feature if your host system requires this data format. Enable NOTIS Editing *Disable NOTIS Editing Symbologies 12-43 MSI Enable/Disable MSI To enable or disable MSI, scan the appropriate bar code below. Enable MSI *Disable MSI Set Lengths for MSI The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. • • • • One Discrete Length - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI - One Discrete Length, then scan 1 followed by 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Two Discrete Lengths - Select this option to decode only MSI symbols containing either of two selected lengths. Select lengths using the numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, select MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, then scan 0, 2, 1, and then 4. To correct an error or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Length Within Range - Select this option to decode a MSI symbol with a specific length range. Select lengths using numeric bar codes in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, first scan MSI - Length Within Range. Then scan 0, 4, 1, and 2 (single digit numbers must always be preceded by a leading zero). To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Any Length - Scan this option to decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner capability. Note Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to be interpreted as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the bar code. To prevent this, select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length - Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications. 12-44 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Set Lengths for MSI (continued) MSI - One Discrete Length MSI - Two Discrete Lengths MSI - Length Within Range MSI - Any Length MSI Check Digits With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits bar code to enable verification of the second check digit. See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 12-45 for the selection of second digit algorithms. *One MSI Check Digit Two MSI Check Digits Symbologies 12-45 Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) Scan the appropriate bar code below to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit. Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable) *Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable) MSI Check Digit Algorithm Two algorithms are possible for the verification of the second MSI check digit. Select the bar code below corresponding to the algorithm used to encode your check digit. MOD 10/MOD 11 *MOD 10/MOD 10 12-46 LS4208 Product Reference Guide RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) The variants of RSS are RSS 14, RSS Expanded and RSS Limited. RSS 14 and RSS Expanded include stacked versions. Scan the appropriate bar code below to enable or disable each variant of RSS. Enable RSS 14 *Disable RSS 14 Enable RSS Limited *Disable RSS Limited Enable RSS Expanded *Disable RSS Expanded Symbologies 12-47 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN This parameter only applies to RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Enable this to strip the leading '010' from RSS-14 and RSS Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the bar code as EAN-13. For bar codes beginning with two or more zeros but not six zeros, this parameter strips the leading '0100' and reports the bar code as UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble parameter that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted bar codes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped. Enable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN *Disable Convert RSS to UPC/EAN 12-48 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Symbology - Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases. Select the redundancy level appropriate for the bar code quality. Redundancy Level 1 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded: Code Type Code Length Codabar 8 characters or less MSI 4 characters or less D 2 of 5 8 characters or less I 2 of 5 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 2 The following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded: Code Type All Code Length All Redundancy Level 3 Code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times: Code Type Code Length MSI 4 characters or less D 2 of 5 8 characters or less I 2 of 5 8 characters or less Codabar 8 characters or less Redundancy Level 4 The following code types must be successfully read three times before being decoded: Code Type All Code Length All Symbologies 12-49 Redundancy Level (continued) *Redundancy Level 1 Redundancy Level 2 Redundancy Level 3 Redundancy Level 4 12-50 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Security Level The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta bar codes, which include the Code 128 family, UPC/EAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of bar code quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for any given application. • • • • Security Level 0: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most “in-spec” bar codes. Security Level 1: Select this option if misdecodes occur. This security level should eliminate most misdecodes. Security Level 2: Select this option if Security level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes. Security Level 3: If Security Level 2 was selected and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. Be advised, selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out of spec bar codes. Selecting this level of security significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is necessary, try to improve the quality of the bar codes. *Security Level 0 Security Level 1 Security Level 2 Security Level 3 Symbologies 12-51 Bi-directional Redundancy Enable Bi-directional Redundancy to add security to linear code type security levels. When enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before reporting a good decode. Enable Bi-directional Redundancy *Disable Bi-directional Redundancy Intercharacter Gap The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is customarily quite small. Due to various bar code printing technologies, this gap may grow larger than the maximum size allowed, causing the scanner to be unable to decode the symbol. If this problem is encountered, scan Large Intercharacter Gaps to tolerate out-of-specification bar codes. *Normal Intercharacter Gap Large Intercharacter Gap 12-52 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Report Version Scan the bar code below to report the software revision installed in the scanner’s primary microprocessor. Report Software Version Report MIMIC Version Scan the bar code below to report the MIMIC software revision installed in the scanner’s secondary microprocessor. Symbol scanners that do not use MIMIC architecture report nothing. Report MIMIC Software Version Report Synapse Cable Scan the bar code below to report the software revision of the attached Synapse cable. If the scanner does not detect an attached Synapse cable, it reports Synapse not attached. Report Synapse Cable Miscellaneous Scanner Options Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Scanning Sequence Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Errors While Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Transmit Code ID Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Prefix/Suffix Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Scan Data Transmission Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 FN1 Substitution Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Synapse Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 13-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-3 Introduction This chapter includes commonly used bar codes to customize how data is transmitted to the host device. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programming Guide p/n 72-69680-xx for further customization options. The scanner ships with the settings shown in the Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table on page 13-4 (also see Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all host device and miscellaneous scanner defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary. To set feature values, scan a single bar code or a short bar code sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner is powered down. If not using a Synapse or USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host. To return all features to default values, scan a default bar code in Default Parameters on page 4-5. Throughout the programming bar code menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*). * Indicates Default *Disable No Read Feature/Option (00h) Hex Value Scanning Sequence Examples In most cases, scan one bar code to set a specific parameter value. Other parameters, such as Prefix Value, require scanning several bar codes. See each parameter for descriptions of this procedure. Errors While Scanning Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter. 13-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Miscellaneous Parameter Defaults Table 13-1 lists the defaults for miscellaneous scanner options parameters. If you wish to change any option, scan the appropriate bar code(s) provided in the Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters section beginning on page 13-5. See Appendix A, Standard Default Parameters for all user preferences, hosts, symbologies, and miscellaneous default parameters. Table 13-1. Miscellaneous Scanner Options Default Table Parameter Default Page Number Transmit Code ID Character None 13-5 Prefix Value 7013 13-5 Suffix Value 7013 13-6 Scan Data Transmission Format Data as is 13-6 FN1 Substitution Values Set 13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message Disable 13-8 Synapse Interface Standard 13-9 Transmit Code ID Character None 13-5 Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-5 Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters Transmit Code ID Character A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned bar code. This may be useful when the scanner is decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID Characters, see Symbol Code Identifiers on page B-3 and AIM Code Identifiers on page B-4. Symbol Code ID Character AIM Code ID Character *None Prefix/Suffix Values A prefix and/or one or two suffixes can be appended to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix or suffix, scan a four-digit number (i.e., four bar codes from Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes) that corresponds to that value. See Table E-1 on page E1 for the four-digit codes. When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, then set the 3-digit decimal value. See Table E-1 on page E-1 for the four-digit codes. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 13-6. 13-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Prefix/Suffix Values (continued) Scan Prefix Scan Suffix Scan Data Transmission Format To change the scan data format, scan Scan Options and one of the following four bar codes corresponding to the desired format: • • • • Data As Is . Scan Enter on page 13-7 to complete the change. To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 13-5. Scan Data Format Cancel on page 13-7 to cancel the change. If a carriage return/enter is required after each scanned bar code, scan the following bar codes in order: 1. Scan Options 2. 3. Enter (on page 13-7). Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-7 Scan Data Transmission Format (continued) Scan Options *Data As Is Enter Data Format Cancel 13-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide FN1 Substitution Values The Wedge and USB HID Keyboard hosts support an FN1 substitution feature. When enabled any FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 bar code is substituted with a value. This value defaults to 7013 (Enter Key). To select an FN1 substitution value via bar code menus: 1. Scan the bar code below. *Set FN1 Substitution Value 2. Look up the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table on page E-1 for the currently installed host interface. 3. Enter the 4-digit substitution value by scanning each digit in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel. To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page page 5-11. To enable FN1 Substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan the Enable FN1 Substitution bar code on page page 7-10. Transmit “No Read” Message Scan a bar code below to select whether or not to transmit a No Read message. When enabled, the characters NR are transmitted when a bar code is not decoded. When disabled, if a symbol does not decode, nothing is sent to the host. Enable No Read *Disable No Read Miscellaneous Scanner Options 13-9 Synapse Interface The auto-detection of a Synapse cable varies in duration depending on the type of Synapse connection. If a scanner is connected to another scanner using a Synapse cable, use the Auxiliary Synapse Port connection. In all other cases, where the cable is used, the default setting is recommended. To disconnect and reconnect the scanner from a Synapse cable that is connected to a live host via a Synapse, use the "Plug and Play" setting. Do not change this setting from the default if an on-board wedge host is enabled. *Standard Synapse Connection Auxiliary Synapse Port Connection “Plug and Play” Synapse Connection 13-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Advanced Data Formatting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Using ADF Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 ADF Bar Code Menu Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Alternate Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Default Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Special Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Pause Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Begin New Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Save Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Quit Entering Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Disable Rule Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Code Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Code Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Message Containing A Specific Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Send Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Setup Field(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Modify Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 Pad Data with Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29 14-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 Send Right Control Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-70 Turn On/Off Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 Alphanumeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77 Advanced Data Formatting 14-3 Introduction Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) is a means of customizing data before transmission to your host device. Scan data can be edited to suit your particular requirements. ADF can be implemented by scanning a related series of bar codes, which begin on page 14-7, or by installing the 123Scan utility (see Chapter 11, 123Scan) which allows the scanner to be set up and programmed with Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rules. If you are using the Wand interface with your scanner, you will not be able to use ADF rules to format your data. Note Rules: Criteria Linked to Actions In ADF, data is customized through rules. These rules perform detailed actions when the data meets certain criteria. One rule may consist of single or multiple criteria applied to single or multiple actions. For instance, a data formatting rule could be the following: Criteria: When scan data is Code 39, length 12, and data at the start position is the string “129”, Actions: pad all sends with zeros to length 8, send all data up to X, send a space. If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X1559828 is scanned, the following is transmitted: 00001299 . If a Code 39 bar code of 1299X15598 is scanned, this rule is ignored because the length criteria has not been met. The rule specifies the editing conditions and requirements before data transmission occurs. Using ADF Bar Codes When you program a rule, make sure the rule is logically correct. Plan ahead before you start scanning. To program each data formatting rule: • • Start the Rule. Scan the Begin New Rule bar code on page 14-7. Criteria. Scan the bar codes for all pertinent criteria. Criteria can include code type (e.g., Code 128), code length, or data that contains a specific character string (e.g., the digits “129”). These options are described in Criteria on page 14-10. • Actions. Scan all actions related to, or affecting, these criteria. The actions of a rule specify how to format the data for transmission. These options are described in ADF Bar Code Menu Example on page 14-4. • Save the Rule. Scan the Save Rule bar code on page 14-7. This places the rule in the “top” position in the rule buffer. • If you make errors during this process, some special-purpose bar codes may be useful: Erase Criteria And Start Again bar code on page 14-8, Erase Actions And Start Again bar code on page 14-8, Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14-8, etc. Criteria, actions, and entire rules may be erased by scanning the appropriate bar code (see bar codes beginning on page 14-10). Use the Beeper Definitions on page 2-4 as a guide for the programming steps. For more information on scanning, see Chapter 2, Scanning. 14-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide ADF Bar Code Menu Example This section provides an example of how ADF rules are entered and used for scan data. An auto parts distribution center wants to encode manufacturer ID, part number, and destination code into their own Code 128 bar codes. The distribution center also has products that carry UPC bar codes, placed there by the manufacturer. The Code 128 bar codes have the following format: MMMMMPPPPPDD Where: M = Manufacturer ID P = Part Number D = Destination Code The distribution center uses a PC with dedicated control characters for manufacturer ID , part number , and destination code . At this center the UPC data is treated as manufacturer ID code. The following rules need to be entered: When scanning data of code type Code 128, send the next 5 characters, send the manufacturer ID key , send the next 5 characters, send the part number key , send the next 2 characters, send the destination code key . When scanning data of code type UPC/EAN, send all data, send the manufacturer ID key . To enter these rules, follow the steps below: Rule 1: The Code 128 Scanning Rule Step Bar Code On Page Beep Indication 1 Begin New Rule 14-7 High High 2 Code 128 14-10 High High 3 Send next 5 characters 14-20 High High 4 Send 14-39 High High 5 Send next 5 characters 14-20 High High 6 Send 14-40 High High 7 Send next 2 characters 14-20 High High 8 Send 14-38 High High 9 Save Rule 14-7 High Low High Low On Page Beep Indication Rule 2: The UPC Scanning Rule Step Bar Code 1 Begin New Rule 14-7 High High 2 UPC/EAN 14-12 High High 3 Send all remaining data 14-20 High High 4 Send 14-39 High High 5 Save Rule 14-7 High Low High Low If you made any mistakes while entering this rule, scan the Quit Entering Rules bar code on page 14-8. If you already saved the rule, scan the Erase Previously Saved Rule bar code on page 14-8. Advanced Data Formatting 14-5 Alternate Rule Sets ADF rules may be grouped into one of four alternate sets which can be turned on and off when needed. This is useful when you want to format the same message in different ways. For example, a Code 128 bar code contains the following information: Class (2 digits), Stock Number (8) digits, Price (5 digits) This bar code might look like this: 245671243701500 where: Class = 24 Stock Number = 56712437 Price = 01500 Ordinarily you would send this data as follows: 24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) 01500 (enter key) But, when there is a sale, you may want to send only the following: 24 (class key) 56712437 (stock key) and the cashier will key the price manually. To implement this, you would first enter an ADF rule that applies to the normal situation. This rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, send the data that remains, send the Enter key. The “sale” rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key. To switch between the two sets of rules, a “switching rule” must be programmed. This rule specifies what type of bar code must be scanned to switch between the rule sets. For example, in the case of the “sale” rule above, the rule programmer wants the cashier to scan the bar code “M” before a sale. To do this, a rule can be entered as follows: When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “M”, select rule set number 1. Another rule could be programmed to switch back. When scanning a bar code of length 1 that begins with “N”, turn off rule set number 1. The switching back to normal rules can also be done in the “sale” rule. For example, the rule may look like this: When scanning a bar code of length 15, send the next 2 characters, send the class key, send the next 8 characters, send the stock key, turn off rule set 1. It is recommended that you scan the Disable All Rule Sets bar code on page 14-9 after programming a rule belonging to an alternate rule set. In addition to enabling and disabling rule sets within the rules, you can enable or disable them by scanning the appropriate bar codes beginning on page 14-9. 14-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Rules Hierarchy (in Bar Codes) The order of programming individual rules is important.The most general rule should be programmed last. All programmed rules are stored in a buffer. As they are programmed, they are stored at the “top” of a rules list. If three rules have been created, the list would be configured as follows: Third Rule Second Rule First Rule When data is scanned, the rules list is checked from top to bottom to determine if the criteria match (and therefore, if the actions should occur). Input is modified into the data format specified by the first matching set of criteria it finds. Be sure that your most general rule is the last one programmed. For example, if the THIRD rule states: When scanning a bar code of any length, send all data, then send the ENTER key. And the SECOND rule states: When scanning a Code 128 bar code of length 12, send the first four characters, then send the ENTER key, then send all remaining data. If a Code 128 bar code of length 12 were scanned, the THIRD rule would be in effect. The SECOND rule would appear to not function. Note also that ADF rules are actually created when you use the standard data editing functions. Scan options are entered as ADF rules, and the hierarchy mentioned above also applies to them. For the LS2108, this applies to prefix/suffix programming in the parameter Scan Data Transmission Format. These rules reside in the same “rule list” as ADF Rules, so the order of their creation is also important. Default Rules Every unit has a default rule to send all scan data. Units with custom software may have one or more default rules burned in. The rules hierarchy checks user programmable rules first, then the default rules. Default rules can be disabled by entering the following general rule in the user programmable buffer: When receiving scan data, send all data. Since this rule always applies, ADF will never go into the default rules. Special Considerations for Multipoint Networks ADF rules scanned by an individual scanner are NOT broadcast to other scanners in the piconet, as are other parameters; however, ADF rules that 123Scan generates ARE broadcast to all scanners in the piconet. 123Scan rules transmitted from the base are stored at the BEGINNING of the ADF rule buffer, regardless of the presence of existing rules, while rules scanned by the scanner are appended to the existing buffer. For this reason, transmit rules to be shared by all scanners from 123Scan FIRST. Then, scan rules to customize an individual scanner after 123Scan rules are transferred. Advanced Data Formatting 14-7 Special Commands Pause Duration This parameter along with the Send Pause parameter on page 14-24 allows a pause to be inserted in the data transmission. Pauses are set by scanning a two-digit number (i.e., two bar codes), and are measured in 0.1 second intervals. For example, scanning bar codes “0” and “1” inserts a 0.1 second pause; “0” and “5” gives a 0.5 second delay. Numeric bar codes begin on page D-3 in Appendix D, Numeric Bar Codes. In case of an error, or to change the selection, scan Cancel on page D-4. Pause Duration Begin New Rule Scan this bar code to start entering a new rule Begin New Rule Save Rule Scan this bar code to save the entered rule. Save Rule 14-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Erase Use these bar codes to erase criteria, actions, or rules. Erase Criteria And Start Again Erase Actions And Start Again Erase Previously Saved Rule Erase All Rules Quit Entering Rules Scan this bar code to quit entering rules. Quit Entering Rules Advanced Data Formatting 14-9 Disable Rule Set Use these bar codes to disable rule sets. Disable Rule Set 1 Disable Rule Set 2 Disable Rule Set 3 Disable Rule Set 4 Disable All Rule Sets 14-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Criteria Code Types Select any number of code types to be affected. All selected codes must be scanned in succession, prior to selecting other criteria. If a code type is not selected, all code types are affected. Scan the bar codes for all code types desired before selecting other criteria. Code 39 Codabar RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Code 128 Advanced Data Formatting 14-11 Code Types (continued) D 2 OF 5 IATA 2 OF 5 I 2 OF 5 Code 93 UPC-A UPC-E EAN-8 EAN-13 14-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Code Types (continued) MSI UCC/EAN 128 UPC-E1 Bookland EAN Trioptic Code 39 Code 11 Advanced Data Formatting 14-13 Code Lengths Define the number of characters the selected code type must contain. If a code length is not selected, selected code types of any length are affected. Scan these bar codes to define the number of characters the selected code types must contain. Select one length per rule only. 1 Character 2 Characters 3 Characters 4 Characters 5 Characters 6 Characters 7 Characters 14-14 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths (continued) 8 Characters 9Characters 10 Characters 11Characters 12 Characters 13Characters 14 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-15 Code Lengths (continued) 15 Characters 16 Characters 17 Characters 18 Characters 19 Characters 20 Characters 21 Characters 22 Characters 14-16 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Code Lengths (continued) 23 Characters 24 Characters 25 Characters 26 Characters 27 Characters 28 Characters 29 Characters 30 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-17 Message Containing A Specific Data String Use this feature to select whether the formatting affects data that begins with a specific character or data string, or contains a specific character or data string. There are 4 features: • • • • Specific String at Start Specific String, Any Location Any Message OK Rule Belongs to Set Specific String at Start Scan this bar code, then scan the bar codes representing the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) in the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77. After scanning the following bar code: 1. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. 2. Scan End of Message on page 14-85. Specific String At Start Specific String, Any Location Scan this bar code, then, using the Numeric Keypad on page 14-18, scan a two-digit number representing the position (use a leading “zero” if necessary). Then scan the desired character or characters (up to a total of 8) on the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77, followed by the End of Message bar code on page 14-85. After scanning the following bar code: 1. Enter a location using the “Numeric Keypad” on page 14-18. 2. Enter a string using the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. 3. Scan End of Message on page 14-85. Specific String Any Location Any Message OK By not scanning any bar code, all selected code types are formatted, regardless of information contained. 14-18 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Numeric Keypad Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the alphanumeric keyboard. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Advanced Data Formatting 14-19 Numeric Keypad (continued) 8 9 Cancel Rule Belongs To Set Select the set a rule belongs to. (There are four possible rule sets.) See Alternate Rule Sets on page 14-5 for more information about rule sets. Scan a bar code below to select which set a rule belongs to. Rule Belongs To Set 1 Rule Belongs To Set 2 Rule Belongs To Set 3 Rule Belongs To Set 4 14-20 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Actions Select how to format the data for transmission. Send Data Send all data that remains, send all data up to a specific character selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard on page 14-77, or send the next N characters. N = any number from 1 to 254, selected from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. Use these bar codes to send data. Send Data Up To Character Send All Data That Remains Send Next Character Send Next 2 Characters Send Next 3 Characters Send Next 4 Characters Send Next 5 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-21 Send Data (continued) Send Next 6 Characters Send Next 7 Characters Send Next 8 Characters Send Next 9 Characters Send Next 10 Characters Send Next 11 Characters Send Next 12 Characters Send Next 13 Characters 14-22 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Data (continued) Send Next 14 Characters Send Next 15 Characters Send Next 16 Characters Send Next 17 Characters Send Next 18 Characters Send Next 19 Characters Send Next 20 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-23 Setup Field(s) Table 14-1. Setup Field(s) Definitions Parameter Description Page Move Cursor Move Cursor to a Character Scan the Move Cursor To Character bar code on page 14-24, 14-24 then any printable ASCII character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. When this is used, the cursor moves to the position after the matching character. If the character is not there, the rule fails and ADF tries the next rule. Move Cursor to Start of Data Scan this bar code to move cursor to the beginning of the data. Move Cursor Past a Character This parameter moves the cursor past all sequential occurrences 14-24 of a selected character. For example, if the selected character is ‘A,’ then the cursor moves past ‘A,’ ‘AA,’ ‘AAA,’ etc. Scan the Move Cursor Past Character bar code on page 14-24, then select a character from the Alphanumeric Keyboard. If the character is not there, the cursor does not move (i.e., has no effect). 14-24 Skip Ahead “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of positions to move the cursor ahead. 14-24 Skip Back “N” Characters Scan one of these bar codes to select the desired number of positions to move the cursor back. 14-26 Send Preset Value Send prefix and/or suffix value by scanning the appropriate bar code. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 13-6. 14-27 14-24 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Move Cursor Scan a bar code below to move the cursor in relation to a specified character. Then enter a character by scanning a bar code from the Alphanumeric Keyboard beginning on page 14-77. If there is no match when the rule is interpreted and the rule fails, the next rule is checked. Move Cursor To Character Move Cursor To Start Move Cursor Past Character Send Pause Scan the bar code below to insert a pause in the transmission of data. The length of this pause is controlled by the value of the Pause Duration parameter. Send Pause Skip Ahead Use the following bar codes to skip ahead characters. Skip Ahead 1 Character Skip Ahead 2 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-25 Skip Ahead (continued) Skip Ahead 3 Characters Skip Ahead 4 Characters Skip Ahead 5 Characters Skip Ahead 6 Characters Skip Ahead 7 Characters Skip Ahead 8 Characters Skip Ahead 9 Characters Skip Ahead 10 Characters 14-26 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Skip Back Use the following bar codes to skip back characters. Skip Back 1 Character Skip Back 2 Characters Skip Back 3 Characters Skip Back 4 Characters Skip Back 5 Characters Skip Back 6 Characters Skip Back 7 Characters Advanced Data Formatting 14-27 Skip Back (continued) Skip Back 8 Characters Skip Back 9 Characters Skip Back 10 Characters Send Preset Value Use these bar codes to send preset values. These values must be set using the Scan Prefix and Scan Suffix bar codes on page 13-6. Send Prefix Send Suffix 14-28 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Modify Data Modify data in the ways listed. The following actions work for all send commands that follow it within a rule. If pad zeros to length 6, send next 3 characters, stop padding, send next 5 characters is programmed, three zeros are added to the first send, and the next send is unaffected by the padding. These options do not apply to the Send Keystroke or Send Preset Value options. Remove All Spaces To remove all spaces in the send commands that follow, scan this bar code. Remove All Spaces Crunch All Spaces To leave one space between words, scan this bar code. This also removes all leading and trailing spaces. Crunch All Spaces Stop Space Removal Scan this bar code to disable space removal. Stop Space Removal Remove Leading Zeros Scan this bar code to remove all leading zeros. Remove Leading Zeros Stop Zero Removal Scan this bar code to disable the removal of zeros. Stop Zero Removal Advanced Data Formatting 14-29 Pad Data with Spaces To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of spaces. This parameter is activated by Send commands. Pad Spaces To Length 1 Pad Spaces To Length 2 Pad Spaces To Length 3 Pad Spaces To Length 4 Pad Spaces To Length 5 Pad Spaces To Length 6 Pad Spaces To Length 7 Pad Spaces To Length 8 14-30 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Pad Spaces To Length 9 Pad Spaces To Length 10 Pad Spaces To Length 11 Pad Spaces To Length 12 Pad Spaces To Length 13 Pad Spaces To Length 14 Pad Spaces To Length 15 Pad Spaces To Length 16 Advanced Data Formatting 14-31 Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Pad Spaces To Length 17 Pad Spaces To Length 18 Pad Spaces To Length 19 Pad Spaces To Length 20 Pad Spaces To Length 21 Pad Spaces To Length 22 Pad Spaces To Length 23 14-32 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Spaces (continued) Pad Spaces To Length 24 Pad Spaces To Length 25 Pad Spaces To Length 26 Pad Spaces To Length 27 Pad Spaces To Length 28 Pad Spaces To Length 29 Pad Spaces To Length 30 Stop Pad Spaces Advanced Data Formatting 14-33 Pad Data with Zeros To pad data to the left, scan the bar code containing the desired number of zeros. This parameter is activated by Send commands. Pad Zeros To Length 1 Pad Zeros To Length 2 Pad Zeros To Length 3 Pad Zeros To Length 4 Pad Zeros To Length 5 Pad Zeros To Length 6 Pad Zeros To Length 7 Pad Zeros To Length 8 14-34 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Pad Zeros To Length 9 Pad Zeros To Length 10 Pad Zeros To Length 11 Pad Zeros To Length 12 Pad Zeros To Length 13 Pad Zeros To Length 14 Pad Zeros To Length 15 Pad Zeros To Length 16 Advanced Data Formatting 14-35 Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Pad Zeros To Length 17 Pad Zeros To Length 18 Pad Zeros To Length 19 Pad Zeros To Length 20 Pad Zeros To Length 21 Pad Zeros To Length 22 Pad Zeros To Length 23 Pad Zeros To Length 24 14-36 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Pad Data with Zeros (continued) Pad Zeros To Length 25 Pad Zeros To Length 26 Pad Zeros To Length 27 Pad Zeros To Length 28 Pad Zeros To Length 29 Pad Zeros To Length 30 Stop Pad Zeros Advanced Data Formatting 14-37 Beeps Select a beep sequence for each ADF rule. Beep Once Beep Twice Beep Three Times 14-38 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) Control Characters Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keystroke Send Control 2 Send Control A Send Control B Send Control C Send Control D Send Control E Send Control F Send Control G Advanced Data Formatting 14-39 Control Characters (continued) Send Control H Send Control I Send Control J Send Control K Send Control L Send Control M Send Control N Send Control O 14-40 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Control Characters (continued) Send Control P Send Control Q Send Control R Send Control S Send Control T Send Control U Send Control V Send Control W Advanced Data Formatting 14-41 Control Characters (continued) Send Control X Send Control Y Send Control Z Send Control [ Send Control \ Send Control ] Send Control 6 Send Control - 14-42 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters Scan the “Send __” bar code for the desired keyboard characters Send Space Send ! Send “ Send # Send $ Send % Send & Send ‘ Advanced Data Formatting 14-43 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send ( Send ) Send * Send + Send , Send - Send . Send / 14-44 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send 0 Send 1 Send 2 Send 3 Send 4 Send 5 Send 6 Send 7 Advanced Data Formatting 14-45 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send 8 Send 9 Send : Send ; Send < Send = Send > Send ? 14-46 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send @ Send A Send B Send C Send D Send E Send F Send G Advanced Data Formatting 14-47 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send H Send I Send J Send K Send L Send M Send N Send O 14-48 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send P Send Q Send R Send S Send T Send U Send V Send W Advanced Data Formatting 14-49 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send X Send Y Send Z Send [ Send \ Send ] Send ^ Send _ 14-50 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send ` Send a Send b Send c Send d Send e Send f Send g Advanced Data Formatting 14-51 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send h Send i Send j Send k Send l Send m Send n Send o 14-52 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Keyboard Characters (continued) Send p Send q Send r Send s Send t Send u Send v Send w Advanced Data Formatting 14-53 Keyboard Characters (continued) Send x Send y Send z Send { Send | Send } Send ~ 14-54 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters Send Alt 2 Send Alt A Send Alt B Send Alt C Send Alt D Send Alt E Send Alt F Send Alt G Advanced Data Formatting 14-55 Send ALT Characters (continued) Send Alt H Send Alt I Send Alt J Send Alt K Send Alt L Send Alt M Send Alt N Send Alt O 14-56 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send ALT Characters (continued) Send Alt P Send Alt Q Send Alt R Send Alt S Send Alt T Send Alt U Send Alt V Send Alt W Advanced Data Formatting 14-57 Send ALT Characters (continued) Send Alt X Send Alt Y Send Alt Z Send Alt [ Send Alt \ Send Alt ] Send Alt 6 Send Alt - 14-58 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters Send Keypad * Send Keypad + Send Keypad - Send Keypad . Send Keypad / Send Keypad 0 Send Keypad 1 Send Keypad 2 Advanced Data Formatting 14-59 Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Keypad 3 Send Keypad 4 Send Keypad 5 Send Keypad 6 Send Keypad 7 Send Keypad 8 Send Keypad 9 Send Keypad Enter 14-60 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Keypad Numlock NUM LOCK Send Break Key Send Delete Key Send Page Up Key Send End Key Send Page Down Key Send Pause Key Send Scroll Lock Key Advanced Data Formatting 14-61 Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Backspace Key Send Tab Key Send Print Screen Key Send Insert Key Send Home Key Send Enter Key Send Escape Key Send Up Arrow Key 14-62 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Keypad Characters (continued) Send Down Arrow Key Send Left Arrow Key Send Right Arrow Key Advanced Data Formatting 14-63 Send Function Key Send F1 Key Send F2 Key Send F3 Key Send F4 Key Send F5 Key Send F6 Key 14-64 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send F7 Key Send F8 Key Send F9 Key Send F10 Key Send F11 Key Send F12 Key Send F13 Key Send F14 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14-65 Send Function Key (continued) Send F15 Key Send F16 Key Send F17 Key Send F18 Key Send F19 Key Send F20 Key Send F21 Key Send F22 Key 14-66 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send F23 Key Send F24 Key Send PF1 Key Send PF2 Key Send PF3 Key Send PF4 Key Send PF5 Key Send PF6 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14-67 Send Function Key (continued) Send PF7 Key Send PF8 Key Send PF9 Key Send PF10 Key Send PF11 Key Send PF12 Key Send PF13 Key Send PF14 Key 14-68 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Function Key (continued) Send PF15 Key Send PF16 Key Send PF17 Key Send PF18 Key Send PF19 Key Send PF20 Key Send PF21 Key Send PF22 Key Advanced Data Formatting 14-69 Send Function Key (continued) Send PF23 Key Send PF24 Key Send PF25 Key Send PF26 Key Send PF27 Key Send PF28 Key Send PF29 Key Send PF30 Key 14-70 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Right Control Key The “Send Right Control Key” action sends a tap (press and release) of the Right Control Key. Send Right Control Key Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters The “Send Graphic User Interface Character” actions tap the specified key while holding the System Dependent Graphic User Interface (GUI) Key. The definition of the Graphic User Interface key is dependent upon the attached system: Send GUI 0 Send GUI 1 Send GUI 2 Send GUI 3 Send GUI 4 Send GUI 5 Advanced Data Formatting 14-71 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI 6 Send GUI 7 Send GUI 8 Send GUI 9 Send GUI A Send GUI B Send GUI C 14-72 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI D Send GUI E Send GUI F Send GUI G Send GUI H Send GUI I Send GUI J Advanced Data Formatting 14-73 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI K Send GUI L Send GUI M Send GUI N Send GUI O Send GUI P Send GUI Q 14-74 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI R Send GUI S Send GUI T Send GUI U Send GUI V Send GUI W Send GUI X Advanced Data Formatting 14-75 Send Graphic User Interface (GUI) Characters (continued) Send GUI Y Send GUI Z 14-76 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Turn On/Off Rule Sets Use these bar codes to turn rule sets on and off. Turn On Rule Set 1 Turn On Rule Set 2 Turn On Rule Set 3 Turn On Rule Set 4 Turn Off Rule Set 1 Turn Off Rule Set 2 Turn Off Rule Set 3 Turn Off Rule Set 4 Advanced Data Formatting 14-77 Alphanumeric Keyboard Space # $ % * + (Dash) . 14-78 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) / ! “ & “ ( ) Advanced Data Formatting 14-79 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) : ; < = > ? @ 14-80 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) [ \ ] ^ _ (Underscore) ` Advanced Data Formatting 14-81 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) Bar codes on this page should not be confused with those on the numeric keypad. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 14-82 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) 7 8 9 A B C D Advanced Data Formatting 14-83 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) E F G H I J K L 14-84 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) M N O P Q R S T Advanced Data Formatting 14-85 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) U V W X Y Z Cancel End of Message 14-86 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) a b c d e f g h Advanced Data Formatting 14-87 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) i j k l m n o 14-88 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) p q r s t u v Advanced Data Formatting 14-89 Alphanumeric Keyboard (continued) w x y z { | } ~ 14-90 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Standard Default Parameters Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table Parameter Default Page Number Set Default Parameter Restore Defaults 4-5 Beeper Tone Medium 4-6 Beeper Volume High 4-6 Power Mode Continuous On 4-7 Scan Pattern Multi-line Always Raster 4-7 Scan Line Width Full Width 4-8 Laser On Time 3.0 Sec 4-8 Beep After Good Decode Enable 4-9 IBM PC/AT& IBM PC Compatibles1 5-5 User Preferences Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters Keyboard Wedge Host Type 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. A-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Country Types (Country Codes) North American 5-3 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 5-3 Keystroke Delay No Delay 5-8 Intra-Keystroke Delay Disable 5-8 Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Disable 5-9 Caps Lock On Disable 5-9 Caps Lock Override Disable 5-9 Convert Wedge Data No Convert 5-10 Function Key Mapping Disable 5-10 FN1 Substitution Disable 5-11 Send and Make Break Send 5-11 RS-232 Host Types Standard 6-7 Baud Rate 9600 6-8 Parity Type None 6-9 Stop Bit Select 1 Stop Bit 6-10 Data Bits (ASCII Format) 8-Bit 6-10 Check Receive Errors Enable 6-12 Hardware Handshaking None 6-13 Software Handshaking None 6-13 Host Serial Response Time-out 2 Sec 6-14 RTS Line State Low RTS 6-15 Beep on Disable 6-15 Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 6-17 Ignore Unknown Characters Send Bar Code 6-17 RS-232 Host Parameters 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Standard Default Parameters A-3 Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number USB Device Type HID Keyboard Emulation 7-5 USB Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) North American 7-6 USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 7-8 USB CAPS Lock Override Disable 7-8 USB Ignore Unknown Characters Send 7-9 Emulate Keypad Disable 7-9 USB FN1 Substitution Disable 7-10 Function Key Mapping Disable 7-10 Simulated Caps Lock Disable 7-11 Convert Case No Case Conversion 7-11 Port Address None Selected 8-5 Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 8-6 Ignore Beep Disable 8-7 Ignore Bar Code Configuration Disable 8-7 Wand Emulation Host Types Symbol OmniLink Interface Controller1 9-5 Leading Margin 80 msec 9-6 Polarity Bar High/Margin Low 9-7 Ignore Unknown Characters Send 9-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Disable 9-8 Convert Code 39 to Full ASCII Disable 9-9 Beep Style Beep on Successful Transmit 10-5 Parameter Pass-Through Parameter Process and Pass Through 10-6 USB Host Parameters IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters Wand Emulation Host Parameters Scanner Emulation 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. A-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Convert Newer Code Types Convert Newer Code Types 10-6 Module Width 20 µs 10-7 Convert All Bar Codes to Code 39 Do Not Convert Bar Codes to Code 39 10-7 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 10-7 Transmission Timeout 3 Sec 10-8 Ignore Unknown Characters Ignore Unknown Characters 10-9 Leading Margin 2 ms 10-9 Check for Decode LED Check for Decode LED 10-10 None1 11-3 UPC-A Enable 12-7 UPC-E Enable 12-7 UPC-E1 Disable 12-8 EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable 12-8 EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable 12-8 Bookland EAN Disable 12-9 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2 and 5 digits) Ignore 12-10 Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 7 12-10 Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable 12-13 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable 12-13 Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable 12-14 UPC-A Preamble System Character 12-14 UPC-E Preamble System Character 12-15 UPC-E1 Preamble System Character 12-16 Convert UPC-E to A Disable 12-16 Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable 12-17 123Scan Configuration Tool 123Scan Configuration UPC/EAN 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Standard Default Parameters Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable 12-17 Bookland ISBN Format ISBN-10 12-18 UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable 12-18 Code 128 Enable 12-19 UCC/EAN-128 Enable 12-19 ISBT 128 (non-concatenated) Enable 12-20 Code 39 Enable 12-21 Trioptic Code 39 Disable 12-21 Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable 12-22 Code 32 Prefix Disable 12-22 Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55 12-23 Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-23 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable 12-24 Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable 12-25 Buffer Code 39 Disable 12-26 Code 93 Disable 12-29 Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55 12-29 Code 11 Disable 12-31 Set Lengths for Code 11 4 to 55 12-31 Code 11 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-33 Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) Disable 12-33 Enable 12-34 Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. A-5 A-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14 12-34 I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable 12-35 Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable 12-36 Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable 12-36 Discrete 2 of 5 Disable 12-37 Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 12 12-37 Disable 12-39 Codabar Disable 12-40 Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55 12-40 CLSI Editing Disable 12-41 NOTIS Editing Disable 12-42 MSI Disable 12-43 Set Length(s) for MSI 2 to 55 12-43 MSI Check Digits One 12-44 Transmit MSI Check Digit Disable 12-45 MSI Check Digit Algorithm Mod 10/Mod 10 12-45 RSS 14 Disable 12-46 RSS Limited Disable 12-46 RSS Expanded Disable 12-46 Convert RSS to UPC/EAN Disable 12-47 1 12-49 Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) Chinese 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Chinese 2 of 5 Codabar (NW - 7) MSI RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) Symbology - Specific Security Levels Redundancy Level 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. Standard Default Parameters A-7 Table A-1. Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) Parameter Default Page Number Security Levels 0 12-50 Bi-directional Redundancy Disable 12-51 Intercharacter Gap Normal Intercharacter Gap 12-51 Report Version 12-52 Report MIMIC Version 12-52 Report Synapse Cable 12-52 Miscellaneous Scanner Options Transmit Code ID Character None 13-5 Prefix Value 7013 13-5 Suffix Value 7013 13-5 Scan Data Transmission Format Data As Is 13-7 FN1 Substitution Values Set 13-8 Transmit “No Read” Message Disable 13-8 Synapse Interface Standard 13-9 1User selection is required to configure this interface and this is the most common selection. A-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Programming Reference Symbol Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 AIM Code Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4 B-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Programming Reference B-3 Symbol Code Identifiers Table B-1. Symbol Code Characters Code Character Code Type A UPC/EAN B Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32 C Codabar D Code 128, ISBT 128 E Code 93 F Interleaved 2 of 5 G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA H Code 11 J MSI K UCC/EAN-128 L Bookland EAN M Trioptic Code 39 N Coupon Code R RSS Family B-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide AIM Code Identifiers Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where: ] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see Table B-2) m = Modifier Character (see Table B-3) Table B-2. Aim Code Characters Code Character Code Type A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32 C Code 128 (all variants), Coupon (Code 128 portion) E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion) e RSS Family F Codabar G Code 93 H Code 11 I Interleaved 2 of 5 M MSI S D2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5 X Bookland EAN, Code 39 Trioptic The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table B-3. Table B-3. Modifier Characters Code Type Code 39 Option Value Option 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing. 1 Reader has checked one check character. 3 Reader has checked and stripped check character. 4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion. 5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character. 7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character. Example: A Full ASCII bar code with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as ]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4). Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Trioptic bar code 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356 Programming Reference B-5 Table B-3. Modifier Characters (Continued) Code Type Option Value Code 128 Option 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position. 1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position. 2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position. Example: A Code (EAN) 128 bar code with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position, AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing. 1 Reader has validated check digit. 3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit. Example: An I 2 of 5 bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123 Codabar 0 No check digit processing. 1 Reader has checked check digit. 3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission. Example: A Codabar bar code without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123 Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Code 93 bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905 MSI 0 Check digits are sent. 1 No check digit is sent. Example: An MSI bar code 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as ]M14123 D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A D 2 of 5 bar code 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123 UPC/EAN 0 Standard packet in full EAN country code format, which is 13 digits for UPCA and UPC-E (not including supplemental data). 1 Two-digit supplement data only. 2 Five-digit supplement data only. 4 EAN-8 data packet. Example: A UPC-A bar code 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905 Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0. Example: A Bookland EAN bar code 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X Code 11 RSS Family 0 Single check digit 1 Two check digits 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted. No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. RSS-14 and RSS-Limited transmit with an Application Identifier “01”.Note: In UCC/EAN-128 emulation mode, RSS is transmitted using Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1). Example: An RSS-14 bar code 100123456788902 is transmitted as ]e001100123456788902. B-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Sample Bar Codes Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 UPC-A, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 EAN-13, 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 RSS-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5 C-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Sample Bar Codes Code 39 123ABC UPC/EAN UPC-A, 100% 0 12345 67890 5 EAN-13, 100% 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0 Code 128 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 C-3 C-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Interleaved 2 of 5 12345678901231 RSS RSS variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see RSS (Reduced Space Symbology) on page 1246). RSS 10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523 (RSS Expanded Stacked) 1234890hjio9900mnb (RSS Expanded) 08672345650916 (RSS Limited) Sample Bar Codes RSS-14 55432198673467 (RSS-14 Truncated) 90876523412674 (RSS-14 Stacked) 78123465709811 (RSS-14 Stacked Omni-Directional) C-5 C-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 D-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s). 0 1 2 3 4 5 D-3 D-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Numeric Bar Codes For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered bar code(s). 6 7 8 9 Cancel To correct an error or change a selection, scan the bar code below. Cancel ASCII Character Sets Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1000 %U CTRL 2 1001 $A CTRL A 1002 $B CTRL B 1003 $C CTRL C 1004 $D CTRL D 1005 $E CTRL E 1006 $F CTRL F 1007 $G CTRL G 1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE1 1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB1 1010 $J CTRL J 1011 $K CTRL K 1012 $L CTRL L E-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1 1014 $N CTRL N 1015 $O CTRL O 1016 $P CTRL P 1017 $Q CTRL Q 1018 $R CTRL R 1019 $S CTRL S 1020 $T CTRL T 1021 $U CTRL U 1022 $V CTRL V 1023 $W CTRL W 1024 $X CTRL X 1025 $Y CTRL Y 1026 $Z CTRL Z 1027 %A CTRL [ 1028 %B CTRL \ 1029 %C CTRL ] 1030 %D CTRL 6 1031 %E CTRL - 1032 Space Space 1033 /A ! 1034 /B “ 1035 /C # 1036 /D ? 1037 /E % 1038 /F & 1039 /G ‘ 1040 /H ( ASCII Character Sets E-3 Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1041 /I ) 1042 /J * 1043 /K + 1044 /L , 1045 - - 1046 . . 1047 /o / 1048 0 0 1049 1 1 1050 2 2 1051 3 3 1052 4 4 1053 5 5 1054 6 6 1055 7 7 1056 8 8 1057 9 9 1058 /Z : 1059 %F ; 1060 %G < 1061 %H = 1062 %I > 1063 %J ? 1064 %V @ 1065 A A 1066 B B 1067 C C 1068 D D E-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1069 E E 1070 F F 1071 G G 1072 H H 1073 I I 1074 J J 1075 K K 1076 L L 1077 M M 1078 N N 1079 O O 1080 P P 1081 Q Q 1082 R R 1083 S S 1084 T T 1085 U U 1086 V V 1087 W W 1088 X X 1089 Y Y 1090 Z Z 1091 %K [ 1092 %L \ 1093 %M ] 1094 %N ^ 1095 %O _ 1096 %W ‘ ASCII Character Sets E-5 Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1097 +A a 1098 +B b 1099 +C c 1100 +D d 1101 +E e 1102 +F f 1103 +G g 1104 +H h 1105 +I i 1106 +J j 1107 +K k 1108 +L l 1109 +M m 1110 +N n 1111 +O o 1112 +P p 1113 +Q q 1114 +R r 1115 +S s 1116 +T t 1117 +U u 1118 +V v 1119 +W w 1120 +X x 1121 +Y y 1122 +Z z 1123 %P { 1124 %Q I E-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table E-1. ASCII Value Standard Default Parameters Table (Continued) ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 Encode Character Keystroke 1125 %R } 1126 %S ~ The keystroke in bold is sent only if the “Function Key Mapping” is enabled. Otherwise, the unbolded keystroke is sent. Table E-2. ALT Key Standard Default Tables ALT Keys Keystroke 2064 ALT 2 2065 ALT A 2066 ALT B 2067 ALT C 2068 ALT D 2069 ALT E 2070 ALT F 2071 ALT G 2072 ALT H 2073 ALT I 2074 ALT J 2075 ALT K 2076 ALT L 2077 ALT M 2078 ALT N 2079 ALT O 2080 ALT P 2081 ALT Q 2082 ALT R 2083 ALT S 2084 ALT T 2085 ALT U 2086 ALT V 2087 ALT W 2088 ALT X 2089 ALT Y 2090 ALT Z ASCII Character Sets E-7 Table E-3. Misc. Key Standard Default Table Misc. Key Keystroke 3001 PA 1 3002 PA 2 3003 CMD 1 3004 CMD 2 3005 CMD 3 3006 CMD 4 3007 CMD 5 3008 CMD 6 3009 CMD 7 3010 CMD 8 3011 CMD 9 3012 CMD 10 3013 CMD 11 3014 CMD 12 3015 CMD 13 3016 CMD 14 Table E-4. GUI Shift Keys GUI Shift Keys The Apple™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar. Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key. Other Value Keystroke 3048 GUI 0 3049 GUI 1 3050 GUI 2 3051 GUI 3 3052 GUI 4 3053 GUI 5 3054 GUI 6 3055 GUI 7 3056 GUI 8 3057 GUI 9 3065 GUI A 3066 GUI B 3067 GUI C E-8 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table E-4. GUI Shift Keys (Continued) 3068 GUI D 3069 GUI E 3070 GUI F 3071 GUI G 3072 GUI H 3073 GUI I 3074 GUI J 3075 GUI K 3076 GUI L 3077 GUI M 3078 GUI N 3079 GUI O 3080 GUI P 3081 GUI Q 3082 GUI R 3083 GUI S 3084 GUI T 3085 GUI U 3086 GUI V 3087 GUI W 3088 GUI X 3089 GUI Y 3090 GUI Z Table E-5. PF Key Standard Default Table PF Keys Keystroke 4001 PF 1 4002 PF 2 4003 PF 3 4004 PF 4 4005 PF 5 4006 PF 6 4007 PF 7 4008 PF 8 4009 PF 9 ASCII Character Sets E-9 Table E-5. PF Key Standard Default Table (Continued) PF Keys Keystroke 4010 PF 10 4011 PF 11 4012 PF 12 4013 PF 13 4014 PF 14 4015 PF 15 4016 PF 16 Table E-6. F key Standard Default Table F Keys Keystroke 5001 F1 5002 F2 5003 F3 5004 F4 5005 F5 5006 F6 5007 F7 5008 F8 5009 F9 5010 F 10 5011 F 11 5012 F 12 5013 F 13 5014 F 14 5015 F 15 5016 F 16 5017 F 17 5018 F 18 5019 F 19 5020 F 20 5021 F 21 5022 F 22 5023 F 23 5024 F 24 E-10 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Table E-7. Numeric Key Standard Default Table Numeric Keypad Keystroke 6042 * 6043 + 6044 Undefined 6045 - 6046 . 6047 / 6048 0 6049 1 6050 2 6051 3 6052 4 6053 5 6054 6 6055 7 6056 8 6057 9 6058 Enter 6059 Num Lock Table E-8. Extended Keypad Standard Default Table Extended Keypad Keystroke 7001 Break 7002 Delete 7003 Pg Up 7004 End 7005 Pg Dn 7006 Pause 7007 Scroll Lock 7008 Backspace 7009 Tab 7010 Print Screen 7011 Insert 7012 Home ASCII Character Sets E-11 Table E-8. Extended Keypad Standard Default Table (Continued) Extended Keypad Keystroke 7013 Enter 7014 Escape 7015 Up Arrow 7016 Dn Arrow 7017 Left Arrow 7018 Right Arrow E-12 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Index Numerics 123Scan configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 A actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-20 move cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 send data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-77 alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37 code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13 code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-10 default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 move cursor past a character . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 move cursor to a character . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 move cursor to start of data . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18 pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-29 pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8, 11-3, 14-3 rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-54 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-63 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42 send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 send value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 skip ahead "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 skip back "n" characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 specific string any location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 any message ok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 at start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 rule belongs to set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-76 zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 advanced data formatting . . . . 2-4, 3-3, 9-8, 11-3, 14-3 actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-20 alphanumeric keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-77 alternate rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 bar code menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37 code lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3, 14-10 default rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 pad spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29 IN-2 LS4208 Product Reference Guide pad zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 rules hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 send alt characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-54 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38 send function key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-63 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-42 send keypad characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-58 send preset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-27 setup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23 skip ahead characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 skip back characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-26 space removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 special commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 specific data string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 turn off rule sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-76 zero removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-28 aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 ASCII values keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18 standard defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 assembling the stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 B bar code defaults all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 bar codes 123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 data options pause duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7 IBM 468X/469X convert unkown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 ignore bar code configuration . . . . . . . . .8-7 ignore beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . .5-9 caps lock on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 capsl ock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 country keyboard types (country codes) .5-6 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 ignore unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 miscellaneous FN1 sub values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 scan data transmission format . . . . . . . 13-6 synapse interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 transmit code ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 transmit no read msg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 report mimic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 RS-232 baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 beep on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 host serial response time-out . . . . . . . . 6-14 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 ignore unkown characters . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Nixdorf Beep/LED options . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 stop bit select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 symbologies bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 bookland EAN, enable/disable . . . . . . . 12-9 Chinese 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-39 codabar CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41 codabar lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 codabar NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42 codabar, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 11 check digit verification . . . . . 12-33 code 11 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 code 11, transmit check digits . . . . . . 12-33 code 128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 code 39 transmit buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 code 39 buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 code 39 check digit verification . . . . . 12-24 code 39 full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . 12-25 code 39 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 code 39 transmit check digit . . . . . . . 12-24 code 39, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 code 93 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 code 93, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 discrete 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37 discrete 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-37 EAN-13/EAN-8, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-8 Index IN-3 EAN-8/JAN-8 extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 I 2 of 5 check digit verification . . . . . . 12-35 I 2 of 5 convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . 12-36 I 2 of 5 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 I 2 of 5 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 12-36 I 2 of 5, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34 intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 ISBT 128, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 MSI check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 MSI check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44 MSI lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 MSI transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . 12-45 MSI, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 redundancy levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 RSS, convert to UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . 12-47 RSS, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 bi-directional redundancy . . . . . 12-51 supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 trioptic code 39, enable/disable . . . . . 12-21 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . 12-18 UCC/EAN-128, enable/disable . . . . . . 12-19 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-A transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . 12-13 UPC-A/UPC-E, enable/disable . . . . . . . 12-7 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 UPC-E transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . 12-13 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 UPC-E1 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . 12-14 UPC-E1, enable/disable . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 UPC/EAN/JAN supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 USB caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 country keyboard types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 wand emulation code 39 full ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 convert all bar codes to code 39 . . . . . . . 9-8 host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 leading margin (quiet zone) . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 beeper definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 C cables installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 removing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 6-18, 7-12, E-1 Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31 code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-29 code identifiers AIM code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4 Symbol code IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3 customer interaction center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi D decode zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 default parameters all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 standard default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 DTF bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-37 E error indications ack/nak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 enq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-4 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 3-3 RS-232 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-5, 3-3, 6-14 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7, 6-17, 7-9 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 xon/xoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 H host types IBM (port address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 I IBM 468X/469X connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 IBM 468X/469X parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 IBM defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 intellistand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-9 intercharacter gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-51 IN-4 LS4208 Product Reference Guide interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-34 K keyboard wedge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 keyboard wedge defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 keyboard wedge parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 L LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 M maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 miscellaneous defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 N notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv NW - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 P parameter defaults all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 scanner emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 parameters IBM 468X/469X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 miscellaneous scanner options . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 wand emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 pinouts scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 power supply connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 programming bar codes UPC/EAN bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 Q quiet zone (leading margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 R rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 4-7 report mimic version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report synapse cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 report version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 RS-232 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 RS-232 defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 RS-232 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 RSS bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46 S sample bar codes code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 scan patterns multi-line rastering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 4-7 single line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 4-7 scanner emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 scanner parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 scanning aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7, 7-9 hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-9 miscellaneous scanner options sequence example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 symbologies sequence example . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 user preferences sequence example . . . . . . . . 4-3 security level bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 bi-directional redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51 redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi setup connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 connecting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 connecting keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . 5-3 connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 connecting to an IBM 468X/469X host . . . . . . 8-3 connecting using wand emulation . . . . .9-3, 10-3 installing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 stand assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 standard default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 symbologies defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 synapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 T technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Index IN-5 U unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 UPC/EAN bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 USB defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 USB parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 user preferences bar codes beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 beeper tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 beeper volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 laser on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 scan line width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 scan patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 user preferences defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 user preferences parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 W wand emulation connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 10-3 wand emulation defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 wand emulation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 IN-6 LS4208 Product Reference Guide Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza Holtsville, New York 11742-1300 http://www.symbol.com 72E-69413-03 Revision A - January 2007
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.0 Modify Date : 2007:01:09 12:27:45-05:00 Create Date : 2007:01:04 15:00:42Z Metadata Date : 2007:01:09 12:27:45-05:00 Format : application/pdf Title : untitled Document ID : uuid:651a0dc1-9301-44a3-aaa0-2f217dc8a513 Instance ID : uuid:7d2f7823-b032-49d9-ac60-392e9598c1f5 Page Count : 342 Creator : FrameMaker 7.0EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools